Home

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn

1. AAV49426 04 2014 301 Index of functions 2 wire 2C 42 2nd CURRENT LIMIT 211 3 wire 3C 42 speed 170 speed around a reference 172 AUTO DC INJECTION 164 AUTOMATIC RESTART 245 Auto tuning 44 Brake logic control 177 CATCH ON THE FLY 246 Closed loop synchronous motor 88 Command and reference channels 138 Deferred stop on thermal alarm 251 Direct power supply via DC bus 237 DRIVE OVERHEAT 250 ENA SYSTEM 99 ENCODER CONFIGURATION 120 EVACUATION 235 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS 274 FAULT RESET 244 FLUXING BY LI 91 Half floor 236 TOP Z MANAGEMENT 238 High speed hoisting 191 Inspection 234 JOG 166 Limit switch management 175 Line contactor command 212 Load measurement 189 Load sharing 104 Load variation detection 261 Motor or configuration switching MULTIMOTORS COMFIG 224 Motor thermal protection 247 302 AAV49426 04 2014 Index of functions Noise reduction 101 Output contactor command 214 Parameter set switching PARAM SET SWITCHING 221 4 PASSWORD COd 281 PID regulator 196 Positioning by sensors or limit switches 216 Preset speeds 167 PTC probes 242 RAM
2. Menus OO ee Fin APPLICATION FUNCT o a AULT MANAGEMENT 26 9 So FACTORY SETTINGS e n eal eo CARD taz to tse 3 PASSWORD e 0 38 Simplified menu for fast startup page 46 Visualization of current motor and input output values page 55 Adjustment parameters can be modified during operation page 73 Motor parameters motor nameplate auto tuning switching frequency control algorithms etc page 107 I O configuration scaling filtering 2 wire control 3 wire control etc page 137 Configuration of command and reference channels graphic display terminal terminals bus etc page 150 Configuration of application functions e g preset speeds PID brake logic control etc page 241 Configuration of fault management page 266 Communication parameters fieldbus page 274 Access to configuration files and return to factory settings page 277 Specific menu set up by the user using the graphic display terminal page 278 Menu for the Controller Inside card if present page 281 page 32 A dash appears after menu and submenu codes to differentiate them from parameter codes Examples FUn menu ACC parameter ES The grayed out menus may not be accessible depending on the co
3. PID integral reset L1 No nO Function inactive O L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the function is inactive the PID integral is enabled If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active the PID integral is disabled 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 201 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Speed ref assign PID regulator predictive speed input No nO Not assigned function inactive 11 Analog input 12 12 Analog input 13 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Al4 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card
4. GER 10H1NOO HOLOM e ES 335 soNILL3S H 1 52 54 1 5 LH V LS LL Code r rud r uH r45 AP rbn rbt rbd rLH 16415 rEHP rEEP rFC rFr rFE 16 In r rPe pde 8 r PY c PE PF rPL r PO rPPn r5H 5 315 AAV49426 04 2014 Index of parameter codes Page 202 7 524 ISONILLAS AYOL V4 21 CN 01 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 61 774 LNSWADVNVWN 81 244 e LONN Z1 Ie e N ike CN lo N e zc CN ite d e 164 e m 132 GNVINWOD 91 0 1 549 SLAdLNO SLNdNI 91 10H1NOO HOLOM N 435 SoNILL3S H 1 ul 5 LH VS L H Code rSd 5 r5L r Sf 5 5 pomi r 5L rEH rEU rEr SAC 5H3 SAF SAL SAr SAE SE TE
5. N CN e 7131 GNVINWOD 91 0 1 549 SLNAdLNO SLNdNI 91 10H1NOO HOLOM 335 SoNILL3S H 1 ul 5 LH VS L H Code 45 fe re fb ErH Bip iL Ern ErP Err ETE E5d E STI E55 ESE 59 EEd EEd3 EEH EEL EEU EUL EUn EUnE EUS ug ul ud ug us Ubr 319 AAV49426 04 2014 Index of parameter codes Page 202 7 524 ISONILLAS 21 01 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 61 774 LN3 N39VNVMH 81 253 e ise N 414 LONN NOILVOr1aqdv Z1 m 132 91 0 1 549 SLAdLNO SLNdNI 91 N e N wo N 10 ae 10H1NOO HOLOM 335 soNILL3S H 5NIHO LINOM 1 ul 5 1915 L H Code ure UC b ULP BITE E I UELC UF er U IHI U U THY UILI
6. IL 5 UDOH I LUH3 UOL I UOL 2 uUOLGW UOP UPL UrES usb US USL USE AAV49426 04 2014 320 ATV71S383 programming manual EN AAV494266 08 AAV49426 04 2014
7. AAV49426 04 2014 127 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LO3 assignment Identical to LO1 see page 127 LOS delay time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control 0 Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic O 1 POS State 1 when the information is true 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false LO4 assignment Identical to LO1 see page 127 LO4 delay time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and re
8. 16 speeds 8 speeds 4 speeds 2 speeds Speed reference LI PS16 LI PS8 LI PS4 LI PS2 0 0 0 0 Reference 1 0 0 0 1 SP2 0 0 1 0 SP3 0 0 1 1 5 4 0 1 0 0 SP5 0 1 0 1 SP6 0 1 1 0 SP7 0 1 1 1 SP8 1 0 0 0 SP9 1 0 0 1 SP10 1 0 1 0 SP11 1 0 1 1 SP12 1 1 0 0 SP13 1 1 0 1 SP14 1 1 1 0 SP15 1 1 1 1 SP16 1 See the diagram on page 139 Reference 1 SP1 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn 2 preset speeds No nO Function inactive L4 See the assignment conditions on page 145 No nO 4 preset speeds L1 No nO Function inactive LH LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 145 To obtain 4 speeds you must also configure 2 speeds 0 8 preset speeds L1 No nO Function inactive L4 See the assignment conditions on page 145 To obtain 8 speeds you must also configure 2 and 4 speeds 16 preset speeds No nO Function inactive L4 See the assignment conditions on page 145 To obtain 16 speeds you must also configure 2 4 and 8 speeds No nO 168 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Preset speed 2 0 to 599 Hz Preset speed 3 Preset speed 4 Pre
9. Terminals Integrated Modbus Integrated CANopen card switched CD00 LI2 1 C101 1 C201 1 C301 1 C401 1 CD01 LI3 C102 C202 C302 C402 CD02 14 103 203 C303 C403 CD03 15 104 204 C304 C404 CD04 LIG C105 C205 C305 C405 CD05 LI7 C106 C206 C306 C406 CD06 LI8 C107 C207 C307 C407 CD07 LI9 C108 C208 C308 C408 LI10 C109 C209 C309 C409 CD09 LI11 C110 C210 C310 C410 CD10 LI12 C111 C211 C311 C411 CD11 LI13 C112 C212 C312 C412 CD12 14 C113 C213 C313 C413 CD13 C114 C214 C314 C414 CD14 C115 C215 C315 C415 CD15 1 If 2 3 wire control page 108 3 wire LI2 C101 C201 C301 and C401 cannot be accessed 144 AAV49426 04 2014 1 6 COMMAND CtL Assignment conditions for logic inputs and control bits The following elements are available for every command or function that can be assigned to a logic input or a control bit 111 L11 1110 1110 to Drive with or without option LI6 LI6 LI7 LI7 to With VW3A3201 logic I O card to LI11 L111 1114 1114 With VW3A3202 extended I O card to C101 C101 C110 C110 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO configuration to C111 C111 C115 C115 With integrated Modbus regardless of configuration to C201 C201 C210 C210 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO configuration to C211 C211
10. Band width control current in Hz AUED Auto AUto Calculated using the drive parameters 1 to 200 Hz Manual control The parameter can be accessed if ACCESS LEVEL Expert Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O With graphic display terminal 0A Term 0 00Hz 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 3 SETTINGS MAIN MENU 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 2 3 wire control gt gt Quick 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL Code lt lt 3 OPEN SAVE AS With integrated display terminal Power up Displays the state of the drive AAV49426 04 2014 107 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O The parameters in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present Name Description Adjustment range ELE 2 3 wire control 2 wire 2C ec O 2 wire 2C JC 3 wire 3C 2 wire control This is the input state 0 or 1 or edge 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 which controls running or stopping Example of source wiring LI1 forward LIx reverse 3 wire control pulse commands A forward or reverse pulse is sufficient to command starting a stop pulse is sufficient to command stopping Example of source wiring 4 LM 112 Lix LI1 stop
11. 81 iO 10 ON LONN NOILVOr1adv Z1 N LO zc 2 5 e 2 N 234 2 4 141 GNVINWOD 91 0 1 549 5 SLNdNI 91 10H1NOO HOLOM e e E 335 soNILL3S 1 ul 5 LH V LS L H Code LFS LIE LPE HLS H5U HSP Ibr lbr A IdL e In H Inr In 5P IPHS IPL Ir d ISP 5 IEH JACO JAPL JCF JGE JnuL JOG 1810 1 141 L IdtoL 14d LHF LAr LAS AAV49426 04 2014 310 202 7 5343 ISONILLAS AHOLOV J 01 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 61 774 LNSWADVNVWN 8 1 LO N LONN Z1 N e N Page 132 91 0 1 549 5 SLNdNI 91 10H1NOO HOLOM p 335 SONILL3S
12. N 0 N r 132 GNVINWOD 9 0 1 549 SLNAdLNO SLNdNI 91 wo 10 GER 10H1NOO HOLOM 335 soNILL3S H dns DNIHOLINOW z ul 5 1915 LL Code LLL CLO L5 CnF 1 EnFg L nF5 5 lie COL COP Cor Ib E Pe Cr HJ Lr HH Crle IE ie f LrLH ESE dH3 dHL dHr dH5 dbn dbP db5 dLF dL dC oO 307 AAV49426 04 2014 202 7 674 ISONILLAS 1 01 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 61 774 LNSWADVNVWN 8 1 co LONN Z1 8 Page 132 91 0 1 549 SLNAdLNO SLNdNI 91 a 122 CER 10H1NOO HOLOM e 435 SONILL3S 5 1 015 1915 LL Code Index of parameter codes dEL dLb dLd dLr do 80 Id dO IH 830 15 dIE d d5F d5 d5P
13. 81 LONN 71 204 zs NI CN 132 91 0 1 549 SLAdLNO SLNdNI 91 10 wo lO wo wo wo ae 10H1NOO HOLOM 335 soNILL3S DNIHOLINOW 1 ul 5 LH VS LL Code 15 POH POL PP I PPn PPn5 Ere Pru 12 P5 l 5 PaE PSE P54 P58 E rs PSE le le di FEEL PEH Id IH 15 ip e red res r 34 3H 215 AAV49426 04 2014 314 Index of parameter codes Page 202 7 574 ISONILLAS AHOLOV J 01 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 61 774 LNSWADVNVWN 81 244 LONN Z1 lO 204 j N N e 132 91 0 1 549 SLNdLNO SLNdNI 91
14. Not allowed 72 Download not authorized Lock unlock dLr3 Combination of Locked drv dLrO and Unlock drv dLr1 282 AAV49426 04 2014 16 MONITORING CONFIG This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal Term 0 00 2 MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 0A 6 MONITORING CONFIG 6 1 PARAM BAR SELECT 7 DISPLAY CONFIG This can be used to configure the information displayed on the graphic display screen during operation RUN Term 40 00Hz 80 6 MONITORING CONFIG 6 1 PARAM BAR SELECT 6 2 MONITOR SCREEN TYPE 6 3 COM MAP CONFIG 6 1 PARAM BAR SELECT Selection of 1 to 2 parameters displayed on the top line the first 2 cannot be modified 6 2 MONITOR SCREEN TYPE Selection of parameters displayed in the centre of the screen and the display mode digital values or bar graph format 6 3 COM MAP CONFIG Selection of the words displayed and their format AAV49426 04 2014 283 16 MONITORING CONFIG Name Description o E o o o o El Alarm groups Frequency ref Torque reference Output frequency Motor current ENA avg speed Motor speed Motor voltage Motor power Motor torque Mains voltage Motor thermal state Drv thermal state DBR thermal state Consumption Run time Pow
15. IL EnH EnL EFr E nllr 1 Ens En5P Entr EPL Erco E 5 P AAV49426 04 2014 l Fed FJ 308 Index of parameter codes Page 202 7 533 ISONILLAS AHOLOV J 21 N ug 7 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 61 o ON o 774 81 eo ON e o eo 414 LONN NOILVOr1adv Z1 N c NI 224 o bca N 7131 GNVINWOD 971 0 1 549 SLNAdLNO SLNdNI 91 eo GER 10H1NOO HOLOM E 335 SoNILL3S 1 ul 5 1915 LL 5 FAb FOP FOS 1 FFP TIENE FFU FLG FL FLUE Ip db qp FLU FIC FOF FAL IP 515 FUE Fr Fr Ib EN FrES FrH 5 515 309 AAV49426 04 2014 Index of parameter codes Page 202 7 574 ISONILLAS AHOLOV J 21 276 ug 7 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 61 774
16. 254 AAV49426 04 2014 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 12 4 20mA loss Ignore nO Ignore nO Fault ignored This configuration is the only one possible if AI2 min value CrL2 page 114 is not greater than 3 mA or if AI2 Type Al2t page 114 Voltage 100 Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 162 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 108 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 151 AI3 4 20mA loss Ignore nO Ignore nO Fault ignored
17. Initial response with FFU 100 Reduction in FFU NN Increase in FFU Reference division Reference division Reference division A A A 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 gt 0 gt 0 gt 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Time in ms Time in ms 98 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC ENA SYSTEM ENA SYSTEM is a control profile designed for rotating machines with unbalanced load It only applies to asynchronous motors It is used primarily for oil pumps The operating principle applied Allows operation without a braking resistor Reduces mechanical stress on the rod Reduces line current fluctuations Reduces energy consumption by improving the electric power current ratio ENA prop gain This setting is used to achieve a compromise between the reduced energy consumption and or line current fluctuations and the mechanical stress to which the rod is subject Energy is saved by reducing current fluctuations and increasing the current while retaining the same average speed ENA integral gain This setting is used to smooth the DC bus voltage Start up the machine with a low integral and proportional gain proportional 2590 and integral 1096 in order to avoid an overvoltage trip in the absence of a braking resistor See if these settings are suitable Recommended ad
18. time rPG and correct rdG increased time The oscillation frequency depends on the system kinematics Parameter Rise time Overshoot Stabilization time Static error rPG A NN P d X L N Ze Z NN rdG L S X AAV49426 04 2014 199 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting PID feedback ass No nO Not assigned function inactive In this case none of the function parameters can be accessed 11 Analog input 12 2 Analog input 13 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Network AI AIU 1 Virtual input via communication bus Note If the equipment switches to forced local mode see page 269 the virtual input remains fixed at the last value transmitted ed No nO net channel The parameter can be accessed if PID feedback ass PIF Network AI AIU1 This parameter can also be accessed in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu No nO Not assigned Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted
19. 505 5dL 5dLeg 5dd 5FL SFd SFr IE IE SLL epi fo 5nL SOP SPee 5 SPY AAV49426 04 2014 316 Index of parameter codes Page 202 7 574 ISONILLAS 1 01 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 6 1 774 LNSWADVNVWN 81 LONN 71 E N m N N 132 GNVINWOD 9 0 1 549 SLNAdLNO SLNdNI 91 N GER 10H1NOO HOLOM N 435 soNILL3S i 5NIHO LINOM 1 ul 5 L H 55 SPE SRAT 5PH 5PH 5P IU SP II SP 12 SEMA 5P 14 15 5P IB 5Pd SPL Su fe 55b SSCP 551 SEA SEd SEN SEQ SEP Bile m 1s SEE SUL EHI ERJ ER ERR 317 AAV49426 04 2014 Index of parameter codes Page 202 7 574 ISONILLAS
20. CONNECTION IN PROGRESS VXXXXXX enr MULTIPOINT ADDRESSES Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 Address 4 Address 5 Address 6 ESC MULTIPOINT SCREEN Rdy 0 Rpm 0A 952 Rp NLP 1500 Rpm 1250A Not connected Rdy ORpm Cfg Add Cfg Add Selection of drives for multipoint dialog select each address and check the box by pressing ENT This screen only appears the first time the drive is powered up or if the Cfg Add function key on the MULTIPOINT SCREEN is pressed see below ESC RUN 952Rpm 101A 3 ENT Motor speed 952 rpm Selection of a drive for multipoint dialog Motor current 101A In multipoint mode the command channel is not displayed From left to right the state then the 2 selected parameters and finally the drive address appear menus can be accessed in multipoint mode Only drive control via the graphic display terminal is not authorized apart from the Stop key which locks all the drives If there is a fault on a drive this drive is displayed 292 AAV49426 04 2014 Maintenance Servicing The Altivar 71 does not require any preventive maintenance It is nevertheless advisable to perform the following regularly Check the condition and tightness of the connections Ensure that the temperature around the unit remains at an acceptable level and that ventilation is effective average service life of fans 3 to 5
21. 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS I O 1 6 COMMAND CtL 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn with the exception of the MULTIMOTORS CONFIG function to be configured once only 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt 1 13 USER MENU USER CONFIG The name of the configuration specified by the user in the 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu Menu and parameters switched in multiconfiguration mode As in multimotor mode except for the motor parameters that are common to the three configurations Rated current Thermal current Rated voltage Rated frequency Rated speed Rated power IR compensation Slip compensation Synchronous motor parameters Type of thermal protection Thermal state The auto tuning parameters and motor parameters that can be accessed in expert mode Type of motor control Note No other menus parameters can be switched 224 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Switching command Depending on the number of motors or selected configuration 2 or 3 the switching command is sent using one or two logic inputs The table below lists the possible combinations LI LI Number of configuration 2 motors or configurations 3 motors or configurations or active motor 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 1 1 2 Schematic diagram for multimotor mode Lu Configuration O0 2 Configuration 0 Configuration 1 oak if the 2 contacts 2
22. 5 Oo o 5 c G Eo a 0 9 vl e S o o t x G o oa o na ra 5 a x LL g gt o a o 179 bEn Brake engage freq bEt Brake engage time Brake release freq brt Brake Release time Ibr Brake release FW Brake engage delay ttr Time to restart Jump at reversal AAV49426 04 2014 Key 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Fluxed motor 0 attained attained rE Reverse or Forward or descending ascending Bur20 uonoefu ose Frequency b Frequency 4 Reference Brake logic control vertical or horizontal movement in closed loop mode Flux current 4 Rated flux current 4 Torque current Direction of 4 operation 4 Brake contact State of brake 4 Released Engaged control Type of motor Key bEt Brake engage time brt Brake Release time Ibr Brake release FW tbE Brake engage delay ttr Time to restart AAV49426 04 2014 180 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Brake assignment
23. AAV49426 04 2014 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description SP I5 Preset speed 15 See page 169 Preset speed 15 Preset speed 16 See page 169 Preset speed 16 EE Multiplying coeff graphic terminal Speed limitation See page 173 Limitation of speed variation PID prop gain See page 200 Proportional gain PID integral gain See page 201 Integral gain PID derivative gain See page 201 Derivative gain PID ramp See page 201 PIP2 and vice versa Min PID output See page 201 Minimum value of regulator output in Hz Max PID output See page 201 Maximum value of regulator output in Hz Min fbk alarm See page 201 Minimum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback Max fbk alarm See page 201 Maximum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback Adjustment range 0 to 599 Hz Factory setting 90 Hz 0 to 599 Hz 0 to 100 100 0 to 50 Multiplying coefficient can be accessed if Multiplier ref MA2 MA3 page 157 has been assigned to the 10 0 01 to 100 0 01 to 100 0 00 to 100 500 to 500 or 599 to 599 according to rating PID acceleration deceleration ramp defined to go from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference 0 Hz 0 to 500 or 599 according to rating See page 201 1 See page 201 1 1 If a graphic display terminal is not in use
24. I r 5 Ref 1 channel d nos aL go p P MR 1 Note Forced local is not 1 Fr Ib E speeds 2 4 active in I O profile Ref 1B channel AI3 4 Summing ref 2 ESTEE AM SP1 L Graphic display m Summing ref 3 E terminal LOG 1 Subtract ref 2 9 Y mS SP16 E 1 1 Subtract ref 3 2 n REI o Multiplier ref 2 nO Multiplier ref 3 lt i D speed around a reference PID REGULATOR Y 1 5 High Ramps nO E LI speed PID not assigned 5 5 5 FrH Pat rFr n Ref 2 channel M AC2 DE2 a Low speed c 5 FLO Key Forced local Ref 2 switching Parameter The black square represents the factory setting assignment Instructions Fri SA2 SA3 dA2 dA3 MA2 Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card Frib for SEP and IO Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card Frib for SIM Terminals only accessible if Fr1 lt terminals Fr2 Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card and speed Note Ref 1B channel Fr1b and Ref 1B switching rCb must be configured in th
25. If slip setting gt actual slip The motor is overcompensated the speed is unstable 1 Parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 81 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Asynchronous motor parameters that can be accessed in Expert mode These include Special parameters Parameters calculated by the drive during auto tuning in read only mode For example Rir calculated cold stator resistance The possibility of replacing some of these calculated parameters with other values if necessary For example R1w measured cold stator resistance When a parameter Xyw is modified by the user the drive uses it in place of the calculated parameter Xyr If auto tuning is performed or if one of the motor parameters on which auto tuning depends is modified Rated motor volt UnS Rated motor freq FrS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor speed nSP Rated motor power nPr parameters Xyw return to their factory setting Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting J Stator R measured Cold stator resistance calculated by the drive in read only mode Value in milliohms up to 75 kW 100 HP and in hundredths of milliohms 100 above 75 kW 100 Magnetizing current in A calculated by the drive in read only mode Lfr Leakage inductance in mH calculated by the d
26. If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time tAr has elapsed the procedure is aborted and the drive remains locked until it is turned off and then on again The faults which permit this function are listed on page 297 Max restart time 5 min 5 5 minutes 10 minutes 10 10 minutes 30 minutes 30 30 minutes 1 hour 1h 1 hour 2 hours 2h 2 hours 3 hours 3h 3 hours Unlimited Ct Unlimited This parameter appears if Automatic restart Atr lt Yes YES It can be used to limit the number of consecutive restarts on a recurrent fault AAV49426 04 2014 245 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Catch on the fly Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events Loss of line supply or disconnection Reset of current fault or automatic restart Freewheel stop The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated speed of the motor at the time of the restart then follows the ramp to the reference speed Rotor speed estimated during freewheel operation in order to define the appropriate catch on fly settings is available by Freq catch on fly FCAO it can be monitored with PC Software This function requires 2 wire level control No nO Function inactive Yes YES Function active When the function is operational it activates at each
27. ofA 1 5 T nPr n5L n5P n5P5 5 AAV49426 04 2014 312 Index of parameter codes Page 202 7 524 ISONILLAS AYOL V4 21 01 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 61 774 LNSWADVNVWN 81 o LONN Z1 ike N o e N N e CN j N N N CN 132 91 0 1 549 SLAdLNO SLNdNI 91 GRR 10H1NOO HOLOM 335 soNILL3S H 1 52 54 5 LH V LS LL alice olJ o OY 205 alb BEL Odt DHL ULL OPL UPr 05 PAH PAL PAS PAU PEr PES PF Ig le PLH PL PH5 18 PIC P PERETI P IF PI P IL P ITI PIP 1 313 AAV49426 04 2014 Index of parameter codes Page 202 7 524 ISONILLAS AYOL V4 21 01 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 61 774
28. 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC New parameter and function New parameter error EMF sync rdAE page 87 New parameter PSI align curr max MCr page 86 New parameter PSI align curr max DCU page 106 10 AAV49426 04 2014 Steps for setting up Tips Before you start programming complete the user setting tables page 300 Perform an auto tuning operation to optimize performance page 44 If you get lost return to the factory settings page 276 Note Check that the wiring of the drive is compatible with its configuration PROGRAMMING Procedure applicable if the factory configuration page 12 and use of the SIMPLY START SIM menu only are sufficient for the application 2 Power up without run command lf you are using a separate power supply for the control section follow the instructions on page 17 Select the language if the drive has a graphic display terminal E 4 Configure the SIMPLY START 5 IN menu 2 wire or 3 wire control Macro configuration Motor parameters 9 Perform an auto tuning operation Motor thermal current Acceleration and deceleration ramps Speed variation range 5 Start AAV49426 04 2014 Factory configuration Drive factory settings The Altivar 71 is factory set for the most common operating conditions If the above values are compatible with the application the drive can be used w
29. If auto tuning fails the drive displays No nO and depending on the configuration of Autotune fault mgt tnL page 263 may switch to Auto tuning tnF fault mode Auto tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds Do not interrupt the process Wait for the display to change to Done dOnE nO g Cust stator R syn Acc to drive rating Acc to drive rating Cold state stator resistance per winding The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto tuning operation if it has been performed The value can be entered by the user if he knows it Value in milliohms up to 75 kW 100 HP and in hundredths of milliohms m9 100 above 75 kW 100 HP On the integrated display unit O to 9999 then 10 00 to 65 53 10000 to 65536 AAV49426 04 2014 85 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Code Name Description Read motor param This parameter can only be used with BDH BRH and BSH type motors from the Schneider Electric range Can only be accessed if Encoder protocol UECP page 122 7 Hiperface SCHP Request to load motor parameters from the encoder EEPROM memory No nO Loading not performed or has failed Yes YES Loading is performed as soon as possible then the parameter automatically changes to Done dOnE Done dOnE Loading done The following parameters are loaded Angle offset value ASU page 90 Nom motor spdsync nSPS page 84 Nominal sync nCrS
30. Note If brake is assigned only a ramp stop is possible Check the Type of stop Stt page 162 Brake logic control can only be assigned if Motor control type Ctt page 72 SVC V SVC I FUC or if Motor control type Ctt V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 for ATV71eeeN4 from 90 kW and for ATV71eeeM3X from 55 kW Logic output or control relay No nO Function not assigned in this case none of the function parameters can be accessed R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 LO1 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected dO1 dO1 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment AO1 page 132 7 No nO Movement type Hoisting UEr Traveling HOr Resistive load movement translational motion of overhead crane for example co Note If Motor control type Ctt V F 2pts UF 2 or V F 5pts UF 5 for ATV71eeeN4 from 90 kW nd for ATV71eeeM3X from 55 kW Movement type 051 is forced to Traveling HOr Hoisting UEr Driving load movement hoisting winch for example If Weight sensor ass PES page 190 is not No nO Movement type bSt is forced to Hoisting UEr Brake contact No nO If the brake has a monitoring contact c
31. LI2 forward E LIx reverse A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION To change the assignment of 2 3 wire control tCC press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s It causes the following functions to return to factory setting 2 wire type tCt and Reverse assign rrS below and all functions which assign logic inputs and analog inputs The macro configuration selected will also be reset it if has been customized loss of custom settings It is advisable to configure this parameter before configuring the 1 6 COMMAND CtL and 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn menus Check that this change is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury Transition trn 2 wire type O Level LEL State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run 1 or stop 0 Transition trn A change of state transition or edge is necessary to initiate operation in order to prevent accidental restarts after a break in the power supply O Fwd priority PFO State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop but the forward input always takes priority over the reverse input Reverse assign No nO Not assigned L11 LI1 to LI6 LI7 LI7 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With
32. Ramp switch ass No nO Not assigned L11 L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 ACC and dEC are enabled when the assigned input or bit is at 0 AC2 and dE2 are enabled when the assigned input or bit is at 1 M Acceleration 2 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 5 0s Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS or Nominal freq sync FrSS page 87 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven The parameter can be accessed if Ramp 2 threshold gt 0 or if Ramp switch ass rPS is assigned Deceleration 2 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 5 05 Time to decelerate from Rated motor freq FrS or Nominal freq sync FrSS page 87 to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven The parameter can be accessed if Ramp 2 threshold Frt gt 0 or if Ramp switch ass rPS is assigned 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr page 158 o Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 160 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Dec ramp adapt Yes YES Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp if this has been set at too low a value for the i
33. Selection of units for the Motoring torque lim and Gen torque lim parameters L1 0 196 0 1 unit 0 196 196 1 unit 196 Motoring torque lim 1 0 to 300 The parameter cannot be accessed if Torque limit activ No nO Torque limitation in motor mode as a 96 or in 0 196 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Torque increment IntP parameter Gen torque lim The parameter cannot be accessed if Torque limit activ No nO Torque limitation in generator mode as a or in 0 1 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Torque increment IntP parameter Torque ref assign No nO If the function is assigned the limitation varies between 096 and 300 of the rated torque on the basis of the 096 to 10096 signal applied to the assigned input Examples 12mA on a 4 20 mA input results in limitation to 15096 of the rated torque 2 5 V on a 10 V input results in 75 of the rated torque No nO Not assigned function inactive 11 to 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted O RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Network AI AIU1 Virtual input via communication bus to be configured via Al net channel AIC1 page A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPM
34. This parameter can be accessed if Speed loop type SSL page 95 Standard Std Speed loop filter coefficient Fr Loop Stab 0 to 100 2096 This parameter can be accessed if Speed loop type SSL page 95 High perfor HPF Stability Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient according to the dynamics of the machine Gradually increase the stability to increase control loop attenuation and thus reduce any overspeed 0 to 100 6 FreqLoopGain Frequency loop gain Used to adapt the response of the machine speed transients according to the dynamics For machines with hight resistive torque high inercia of fast cycles increase the gain gradually FreqLoopGain FLG is set to 20 when Motor control type Ctt is set to Sync mot SYn or Sync CL FSY 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming AAV49426 04 2014 57 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Standard speed loop Parameter settings for K speed loop filter SFC Speed prop gain SPG and Speed time integral SIt The following parameters can only
35. e lt gt perd 2s Ey gt Ix En ES iere gt cx 5 gt D E m m m m mnm m BD Dy BD Dy D D D D D Dy D D gt EY a Ex N N o 304 AAV49426 04 2014 Index of parameter codes Code Page 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Geis 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT F Un 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL EES 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 1 SIMPLY START EON 5 IN 1 2 MONITORING SUP 1 3 SETTINGS GEER 1 6 COMMAND TETS 4 PASSWORD C Od HU HU IF IE ADe 134 13 13 103 13 135 AOJE 135 HUH 1 132 134 HUH3 135 AOL I 13 AOL 13 HUL3J 13 HPH 52 54 ASA 89 ASH 1 133 ASH2 134 ASHI 13 ASL 89 ASL ASTE ASLG ASE 89 92 ASES 90 ASU 90 90 HEr 245 Co 99 N Co ER EN N l AUS 52 54 AUE 93 bbH bL 10 bL bo lO es e 2 gt N D AAV49426 04 2014 305 Index of parameter co
36. increases the displayed value Goes to the next menu or parameter or decreases the displayed value Enters a menu or parameter or saves the displayed parameter or value Cg Note Pressing v does not store the selection Press and hold down 22 s V to scroll through the data quickly Save and store the selection ENT The display flashes when a value is stored Normal display with no fault present and no startup 43 0 Display of the parameter selected in the SUP menu default selection motor frequency CLI Current limit CtL Controlled stop on input phase loss dCb DC injection braking in progress FLU Motor fluxing in progress FSt Fast stop nLP Control is powered on but the DC bus is not loaded nSt Freewheel stop Obr Auto adapted deceleration PrA Power Removal function active drive locked rdY Drive ready SOC Controlled output cut in progress tUn Auto tuning in progress USA Undervoltage alarm ASA Measurement of the phase shift angle in progress The display flashes to indicate the presence of a fault AAV49426 04 2014 29 Integrated display terminal Accessing menus Power up XXX Displays the state of the drive e EmJ z swavsmr J 26 So _ E 1 1 26 INFUTSTOUTPUTSCFG
37. sign ramp OrS Signed ramp output between Max frequency tFr and Max frequency tFr PID ref OPS PID regulator reference between Min PID reference PIP1 and Max PID reference PIP2 PID feedback OPF PID regulator feedback between Min PID feedback PIF1 and Max PID feedback PIF2 PID error OPE PID regulator error between 5 and 5 of Max PID feedback PIF2 Min PID feedback PIF1 PID Output OPI PID regulator output between Low speed LSP and High speed HSP Mot power OPr Motor power between 0 and 2 5 times Rated motor power nPr Mot thermal tHr Motor thermal state between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state thermal tHd Drive thermal state between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state Torque 4Q tqMS Signed motor torque between 3 and 3 times the rated motor torque The sign and the sign correspond to the physical direction of the torque regardless of mode motor or generator Example of usage master slave with the TORQUE CONTROL tOr function page 206 Meas mot fr OFrr Measured motor speed Sig o p frq OFS Signed output frequency between Max frequency tFr and Max frequency tFr Mot therm2 tHr2 Motor thermal state 2 between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state Mot therm3 tHr3 Motor thermal state 3 between 0 and 200 of the rated thermal state Uns TrqRef Utr Torque reference between 0
38. 1 01 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 61 774 LNSWADVNVWN 81 iO el g N N el LONN 71 N iO E CN e N 209 N N e N e N 132 971 0 1 549 SLNAdLNO SLNdNI 91 GER 10H1NOO HOLOM v t 335 soNILL3S DNIHOLINOW 1 ul 5 L H EHr EbU Ebr AES ELL Ed EdC I EdLe Edn 2 12 S EHA EHd EHr EHE ELA ELC ELd EL IL EL ITI ELS EnL EDS EDSE AAV49426 04 2014 318 Index of parameter codes Page 202 7 524 ISONILLAS AYOL V4 21 01 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 6 t 774 LNSWADVNVW 81 e 5 N s N LONN Z1 N N CN
39. 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Configuration of analog outputs Minimum and maximum values output values The minimum output value in volts or mA corresponds to the lower limit of the assigned parameter and the maximum value corresponds to its upper limit The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value Parameter assigned Parameter assigned n A Upper limit Upper limit Lower Current or Lower Current or limit voltage imi Min Output Max Output 20 limit Output Min Output 20 mA Ms AOLx or AOHx or or AOHx or AOLx or or UOLx UOHx 10V UOHx UOLx 10V Outputs AO2 and AO3 configured as bipolar outputs strongly recommended for signed parameters The min Output UOLx and max Output UOHx parameters are absolute values although they function symmetrically In the case of bipolar outputs always set the maximum value higher than the minimum value The max Output UOHx corresponds to the upper limit of the assigned parameter and the min Output UOLx corresponds to an average value between the upper and lower limits 0 for a signed and symmetrical parameter such as in the example below Parameter assigned A Upper limit Voltage Min Output Max Output 10v output UOLx UOHx L Lower limit 130 AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Scaling of the assigned parameter The scale of
40. 3 Goto FACTORY SETTINGS GFS YES 276 AAV49426 04 2014 1 13 USER MENU USr This menu contains the parameters selected in the 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu on page 287 With graphic display terminal Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION MAIN MENU ENT 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 13 USER MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD OPEN SAVE AS RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A With integrated display terminal Power up AAV49426 04 2014 277 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD PLC This menu can only be accessed if a Controller Inside card has been inserted Please refer to the documentation specific to this card With graphic display terminal Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS ENT 1 13 USER MENU ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS With integrated display terminal Power up 278 AAV49426 04 2014 3 OPEN SAVE AS This menu can on
41. 96 mA etc select from drop down list Once you have entered the unit if you press ENT the Ramp increment screen will re appear in order to display the name Press ESC to return to Unit The message entered appears Term 0 00Hz while the View button is pressed RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A SERVICE MESSAGE ENT For any service dial Nb characters max 23 gt Names USER MENU NAME DRIVE NAME configuration serial no lines of messages names of Term 0 00Hz units etc are customized as in the example of the parameter name shown opposite USER MENU NAME If no custom settings have been made the standard value appears names units etc Display on 1 or 2 lines of characters Use F1 to change to ABC abc 123 Use the navigation selector button to increment the character alphabetical order and lt lt and gt gt F2 and F3 to switch to the next or previous character respectively FLOW REFERENCE Nb characters max 18 288 AAV49426 04 2014 7 DISPLAY CONFIG RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 7 2 USER MENU PARAMETER SELECTION SELECTED LIST PARAMETER SELECTION 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG ENT ENT PARAMETER SELECTION 1 3 SETTINGS Ramp increment Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 List lt l
42. AUtO Brake engage freq 0 to 10 Hz See page 182 Brake engage frequency threshold Brake engage delay VIS ME See page 182 Time delay before request to engage brake To delay the engaging of the brake for horizontal movement only if you wish the brake to engage when the drive comes to a complete stop 1 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming AAV49426 04 2014 67 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Brake engage time 0 to 5 00 s Os See page 182 Brake engage time brake response time Jump at reversal sola 183 Time to restart 0 to 15 00 s See page 183 Time between the end of a brake engage sequence and the start of a brake release sequence d BRH b4 freq 0 1 to 10 Hz 0 2Hz Parameter can only be modified in ACCESS LEVEL Expert mode If BRH_b4 b
43. Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input Ready rdY Drive ready 124 AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting R1 Delay time 0 to 9999 ms The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt assignment and remains at 0 R1 Active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true Configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt assignment R1 Holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt assignment and remains at 0 R2 Assignment Identical to R1 see page 124 with the addition of shown for information only as these selections can only be configured in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu Brk control Brake contactor control Input cont LLC Line contactor control Output cont OCC Output contactor control End reel EbO End of reel traverse control function Sync wobble tSY Counter wobble synchronization DC charging dCO DC bus precharging contactor control R2
44. CAUTION Motor thermal protection is no longer provided by the drive Provide an alternative means of thermal protection on every motor Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 18 AAV49426 04 2014 Graphic display terminal Although the graphic display terminal is optional for low power drives it is a standard component on high power drives see catalog The graphic display terminal can be disconnected and connected remotely on the door of an enclosure for example using the cables and accessories available as options see catalog Description of terminal 1 Graphic display 2 Function keys F1 F2 F3 F4 see page 20 7 ESC key Aborts a value a parameter or a menu to return 3 STOP RESET to the previous selection button 6 Button for reversing the direction of rotation of the motor 4 RUN button 5 Navigation button Press ENT save the current value To enter the selected menu or parameter Turn CW To increment or decrement a value CCW To go to the next or previous line To increase or decrease the reference if control via the terminal is activated Note Buttons 3 4 5 and 6 can be used to control the drive directly if control via the terminal is activated Disconnected terminal When the terminal is disconnected 2 LEDs become visible Green LED DC bus ON Red LED 8 Fault HMI Modbus AAV49426 04 2014 1
45. Key Parameter The black rectangle represents the factory setting assignment except for Profile Commands Cd1 Cd2 Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card AAV49426 04 2014 143 1 6 COMMAND CtL Command channel for I O profile IO configuration Selection of a command channel A command or an action can be assigned To a fixed channel by selecting an LI input or a Cxxx bit Byselecting e g LI3 this action will always be triggered by LI3 regardless of which command channel is switched Byselecting e g C214 this action will always be triggered by integrated CANopen with bit 14 regardless of which command channel is switched To a switchable channel by selecting a CDxx bit Byselecting e g CD11 this action will be triggered by LI12 if the terminals channel is active C111 if the integrated Modbus channel is active C211 if the integrated CANopen channel is active C311 if the communication card channel is active C411 if the Controller Inside card channel is active If the active channel is the graphic display terminal the functions and commands assigned to CDxx switchable internal bits are inactive Note CD14 and CD15 can only be used for switching between 2 networks They do not have equivalent logic inputs Communication Controller Inside Internal bit can be
46. Special case Parameter speed loop filter not 0 This parameter must be reserved for specific applications that require a short response time trajectory positioning or servo control When set to 100 as described above the regulator is PI type without filtering of the speed reference Settings between 0 and 100 will obtain an intermediate function between the settings below and those on the previous page Example Setting for K speed loop filter SFC lt 100 Speed prop gain SPG affects the passband and response time Speed time integral SIt affects excessive speed Initial response Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 g Time in ms Initial response Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 a 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Reduction in SIT w Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 T Time in ms Increase in SPG Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Reduction in SIT Reference division 0 8 0 6 04 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 d Time in ms Increase in SPG 47 Reference division 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 gt 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms AAV49426 04 2014 59 1 3 SETTINGS SEt High pe
47. assigned input or bit is at 0 Ref 1 channel Fr1 is active see page 146 Ifthe assigned input or bit is at 1 Ref 1B channel Fr1b is active Ref 1B switching rCb is forced to ch1 active Fr1 if Profile CHCF lt Not separ SIM with Ref 1 channel Fr1 assigned via the terminals analog inputs encoder pulse input see page 146 Ref 1B channel einen No nO Not assigned 11 Analog input A12 AI2 Analog input 13 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Note In the following instances only assignments via the terminals are possible Profile CHCF Not separ SIM with Ref 1 channel Fr1 assigned via the terminals analog inputs encoder pulse input see page 146 PID configured with PID references via the terminals 156 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Summing ref 2 Selection of a reference
48. 2 wire 2C ec O 2 wire 2C JC 3 wire 3C 2 wire control This is the input state 0 or 1 or edge 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 which controls running or stopping Example of source wiring INTV 71 424 LH Lik forward NEN reverse 3 wire control pulse commands A forward or reverse pulse is sufficient to command starting a stop pulse is sufficient to command stopping Example of source wiring 424 LM LI2 Lix LI1 stop PT T1 LI2 forward EVE E LIx reverse A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION To change the assignment of 2 3 wire control press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s The following function will be returned to factory settings 2 wire type tCt page 108 as will all functions which assign logic inputs The macro configuration selected will also be reset it if has been customized loss of custom settings Check that this change is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury Macro configuration Start Stop StS Start Stop StS Start stop M handling HdG Handling Hoisting HSt Hoisting Gen Use GEn General use PID regul Pld PID regulation Network C nEt Communication bus Mast slave MSL Master slave Lift LIFt Lifts A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION To change the assignment of Macro con
49. AI3 range 0 10096 POS O 0 100 POS Unidirectional input 100 Bidirectional input Example On a 4 20 mA input 4 mA corresponds to reference 10090 12 corresponds to reference 0 20 mA corresponds to reference 10096 Since is in physical terms a bidirectional input the 10096 nEG configuration must only be used if the signal applied is unidirectional A bidirectional signal is not compatible with a bidirectional configuration AI3 Interm point X ae Input delinearization point coordinate 0 corresponds to Min value CrL3 if the range is 0 100 max value CrH3 AI3 min value CrL3 096 corresponds to 2 if the range is 100 100 100 corresponds to AI3 max value CrH3 Interm point Y 0 to 100 Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference AAV49426 04 2014 115 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with input Al4 in order to check for example for compatibility problems Al4 Type Voltage 10U O Voltage 100 Voltage input O Current 0 A Current input Al4 min value 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if Al4 Type Al4t Current 0 A 0 to 10 0
50. Application functions FLE Fault management E on Communication PLE Controller Inside card 1 A single function can be assigned to each input Advanced Standard 5 E d factory setting Expert E Pr 7 DISPLAY CONFIG Several functions can be assigned to each input Several functions can be assigned to each input Expert parameters Several functions can be assigned to each input Expert parameters Several functions can be assigned to each input 1 Can be accessed if the Controller Inside card is present 34 AAV49426 04 2014 Structure of parameter tables The parameter tables in the descriptions of the various menus can be used with both the graphic display terminal and the integrated display terminal They therefore contain information for these two terminals in accordance with the description below Example 5 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn A Adjustment range Factory setting speed assignment 7 No nO No nO function inactive LI1 L11 E 1 Name of menu on 4 digit 7 segment display 5 Name of menu on graphic display terminal 2 Submenu code on 4 digit 7 segment display 6 Name of submenu on graphic display terminal 3 Parameter code on 4 digit 7 segment display 7 Name of parameter on graphic display terminal 4 Parameter value on 4 d
51. B B B IGBT tests 254 E B Bl E Catch a spinning load 246 Braking resistor thermal protection 263 Motor protection with probes 242 E s Undervoltage management 253 us E 4 20mA loss 255 B B Bl B Uncontrolled output cut output phase loss 249 E Automatic restart 245 Use of the Pulse input input to measure the speed of 259 rotation of the motor Load variation detection 261 AAV49426 04 2014 Setup Preliminary recommendations Turning on and configuring the drive A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Before turning on and configuring the Altivar 71 check that the PWR POWER REMOVAL input is deactivated at state 0 in order to prevent unintended operation Before turning on the drive or when exiting the configuration menus check that the inputs assigned to the run command are deactivated at state 0 since they can cause the motor to start immediately Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury CAUTION INCOMPATIBLE LINE VOLTAGE Before turning on and configuring the drive ensure that the line voltage is compatible with the supply voltage range shown on the drive nameplate The drive may be damaged if the line voltage is not compatible Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Separate control section power supply When the drive control section is powered independently of t
52. C215 C215 With integrated CANopen regardless of configuration to C301 C301 C310 C310 With a communication card in I O profile IO configuration to C311 C311 C315 C315 With a communication card regardless of configuration to C401 C401 C410 C410 With Controller Inside card in I O profile IO configuration to C411 C411 C415 C415 With Controller Inside card regardless of configuration to CD00 Cd00 CD10 Cd10 In I O profile IO configuration to CD11 Cd11 CD15 Cd15 Regardless of configuration cg Note In I O profile IO configuration LI1 cannot be accessed and if 2 3 wire control page 108 3 wire 3C LI2 C101 C201 C301 and C401 cannot be accessed either A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Inactive communication channels are not monitored no lock following malfunction in the event of a communication bus failure Make sure that the commands and functions assigned to bits C101 to C415 will not pose a risk in the event of the failure of the associated communication bus Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury AAV49426 04 2014 145 1 6 COMMAND CtL Name Description Adjustment range Ref 1 channel AI 11 Analog input 12 A12 Analog input Al3 13 AI3 Analo
53. Example configuration windows RDY Term 0 00Hz When only one selection is possible the selection made is indicated by 5 LANGUAGE Example Only one language can be chosen i M Chinese Turkish Russian When multiple selection is possible the selections made are indicated by 1 3 SETTINGS Example A number of parameters can be chosen to form the USER MENUJ Ramp increment Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 Example configuration window for one value RDY Term 0 00 2 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A Acceleration Acceleration 515 93 s Max 99 99 Min 0 01 Max 99 99 The lt lt and gt gt arrows keys F2 and F3 are used to select the digit to be modified and the navigation button is rotated to increase decrease this number 22 AAV49426 04 2014 Graphic display terminal First power up 5 LANGUAGE menu The first time the drive is powered up the user will automatically be guided through the menus as far as 1 DRIVE MENU The parameters in the 1 1 SIMPLY START submenu must be configured and auto tuning performed before the motor is started up Schneider d Electric ATV71HU22N4383 Display for 3 seconds following power up 2 2kW 3HP 380 480V Config 1 3 seconds i 5 LANGUAGE English n Automatically switches to 5 LANGUAGE menu 3 seconds later Select the language and press
54. For motors in parallel the sum of all the cable lengths must be taken into consideration Compare the length given in the table row corresponding to the power for one motor with that corresponding to the total power and select the shorter length Example Two 7 5 kW 10 HP motors take the lengths on the 15 kW 20 HP table row which are shorter than those on the 7 5 kW 10 HP row and divide by the number of motors to obtain the length per motor with unshielded BORSE cable and SOP 6 the result is 40 2 20 m maximum for each 7 5 kW 10 HP motor In special cases for example different types of cable different motor powers in parallel different cable lengths in parallel etc we recommend using an oscilloscope to check the overvoltage values obtained at the motor terminals To retain the overall drive performance do not increase the SOP value unnecessarily 102 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Tables giving the correspondence between the SOP parameter and the cable length for 400 V line supply Altivar 71 Motor Cable cross section Maximum cable length in meters Reference Power Unshielded GORSE cable Shielded GORSE cable Type H07 RN F 4Gxx Type GVCSTV LS LH kW HP in mm AWG SOP 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 SOP 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 ATV71H075N4 0 75 1 1 5 14 109 36 yd 76 55 yd 49 21 114 83 yd 92 96 yd 7
55. Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted Scale the value 8192 transmitted by this input is equivalent to 10 V on a 10 V input A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION If the equipment switches to forced local mode see page 269 the virtual input remains fixed at the last value transmitted Do not use the virtual input and forced local mode in the same configuration Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury AAV49426 04 2014 117 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting RP assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with the Pulse In input in order to check for example for compatibility problems J RP min value 30 00 to 30 00 kHz Frequency corresponding to the minimum speed 0 to 30 00 kHz 30 00 kHz RP max value Frequency corresponding to the maximum speed RP filter 0 to 1000 ms Interference filtering 118 AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Configuration of the encoder input serving as a reference with a frequency generator This reference is not signed therefore the directions of operation must be given via the control channel logic inputs for example Minimum and maximum v
56. Mains V time out 5 to 999 5 5s Monitoring time for closing of line contactor If once this time has elapsed there is no voltage on the drive power circuit the drive will lock with a Line contactor fault LCF AAV49426 04 2014 213 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Output contactor command This allows the drive to control a contactor located between the drive and the motor The request for the contactor to close is made when a run command is sent The request for the contactor to open is made when there is no longer any current in the motor CAUTION If a DC injection braking function has been configured it should not be left operating too long in stop mode as the contactor only opens at the end of braking Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Output contactor feedback The corresponding logic input should be at 1 when there is no run command and at 0 during operation In the event of an inconsistency the drive trips on FCF2 fault if the output contactor fails to close LIx at 1 and on an fault if it is stuck LIx at 0 The parameter Delay to motor run dbS can be used to delay tripping in fault mode when a run command is sent and the Delay to open cont dAS parameter delays the fault when a stop command is set 2 The Out contactor ass OCC and Output contact fdbk functions can be used individually o
57. Not cont FnC at and above 55 kW 75 HP for ATV71eeeeM3X and at and above 90 kW 120 HP for ATV71eeeeN4 In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor n Continuous FCt mode the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up n Not cont FnC mode fluxing occurs when the motor starts up The flux current is greater than nCr configured rated motor current when the flux is established and is then adjusted to the motor magnetizing current CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage If Motor control type Ctt page 72 7 Sync mot SYn the Motor fluxing FLU parameter must be active No FnO is not permitted this parameter causes rotor angle detection or alignment according to the configuration of Angle setting type ASt page 92 and not fluxing If Brake assignment DLC page 181 is not No nO the Motor fluxing FLU parameter has no effect No nO Fluxing assignment L1 No nO Function inactive L11 L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 Assignment is only possible if Motor fluxing FLU lt Not cont FnC Ifan bitis assigned to the motor fluxing command flux is built up when the assigned input or bit is at 1 Ifan
58. e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 108 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 2 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 2 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 151 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 248 AAV49426 04 2014 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Output Phase Loss Yes YES No nO Function inactive O Yes YES Tripping on fault with freewheel stop O Output cut OAC No fault triggered but management of the output voltage in order to avoid an overcurrent when the link with the motor is re established and catch on the
59. menu When one or a number of alarms selected in a group occurs this alarm group is activated Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting o E Ej E o Ej E o EJ E o E o E Ei Al Selection to be made the following list 116 lt al PLA 116 PTC probe alarm PTC1 alarm P1A Probe alarm 1 PTC2 alarm P2A Probe alarm 2 Ext fault al EFA External fault alarm Under V al USA Undervoltage alarm slipping al AnA Slipping alarm I attained CtA Current threshold attained Current threshold Ctd page 69 Freq Th att FtA Frequency threshold attained Freq threshold Ftd page 70 Freq Th 2 attain F2A Frequency threshold 2 attained Freq Th 2 attain F2d page 70 Freq ref att SrA Frequency reference attained Th mot att tSA Motor 1 thermal state attained Th mot2 att 152 Motor 2 thermal state attained Th mot3 att 153 Motor 3 thermal state attained Uvolt warn UPA Undervoltage warning HSP attain FLA High speed attained Al tHA Drive overheating Load mvt al oSA Braking speed alarm Brk cont al Brake contact alarm PID error al PEE PID error alarm PID fdbk al PFA PID feedback alarm 12 Al 4 20 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input A12 Al 4 20 Alarm i
60. nO 12 to 27 if SSI parity SSCP Odd parity Odd or Even parity EUEn Nbr of revolution Undefined Und Format of the number of revolutions in number of bits This parameter can be accessed if Encoder protocol UECP lt SSI SSI O Undefined Und Not defined Only possible value if SSI frame size SSFS Undefined Und Oto 15 0 to SSI frame size SSFS 10 if SSI parity SSCP No parity nO 0 to SSI frame size SSFS 12 if SSI parity SSCP Odd parity Odd or Even parity EUEn Undefined Und Turn bit resolution Resolution per revolution in number of bits This parameter can be accessed if Encoder protocol UECP SSI SSI Undefined Und Not defined Only value possible if Nbr of revolution EnMr lt Undefined Und 10 to 25 If SSI parity SSCP 7 No parity nO the maximum value is SSI frame size SSFS Nbr of revolution EnMr If SSI parity SSCP Odd parity Odd or Even parity EUEn the maximum value is SSI frame size SSFS Nbr of revolution EnMr 2 122 AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting SSI code type Undefined Und Type of code This parameter can be accessed if Encoder protocol UECP SSI 551 Undefined Und Not defined Binary code bln B
61. preset reference 8000 rP4 preset reference 11200 The DISPLAY CONFIG menu can be used to customize the name of the unit displayed and its format Adjustment range 4 reference PIP2 15000 PIP1 6000 gt PID feedback PIF1 PIF2 4500 20000 Other parameters rSL parameter Can be used to set the PID error threshold above which the PID regulator will be reactivated wake up after a stop due to the max time threshold being exceeded at low speed tLS Reversal of the direction of correction PIC If PIC nO the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive for example pressure control with a compressor If PIC lt YES the speed of the motor will decrease when the error is positive for example temperature control using a cooling fan The integral gain may be short circuited by a logic input An alarm on the PID feedback may be configured and indicated by a logic output An alarm on the PID error may be configured and indicated by a logic output AAV49426 04 2014 197 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Manual Automatic operation with PID This function combines the PID regulator the preset speeds and a manual reference Depending on the state of the logic input the speed reference is given by the preset speeds or by a manual reference input via the PID function Manual reference PIM Analog inputs AI1 to Frequency input Encoder Predictive speed r
62. trH Traverse freq high in Hertz trL Traverse Freq Low in Hertz qSH Quick step High in Hertz qSL Quick step Low in Hertz Reel parameters tbO Reel time Time taken to make a reel in minutes This parameter is intended to signal the end of winding When the traverse control operating time since command trC reaches the value of tbO the logic output or one of the relays changes to state 1 if the corresponding function EbO has been assigned The traverse control operating time EbOt can be monitored online by a communication bus and in the Monitoring menu Decrease ref speed Decrease in the base reference In certain cases the base reference has to be reduced as the reel increases in size The dtF value corresponds to time Once this time has elapsed the reference continues to fall following the same ramp If low speed LSP is at 0 the speed reaches 0 Hz the drive stops and must be reset by a new run command If low speed LSP is not 0 the traverse control function continues to operate above LSP Motor speed Base reference ____ With LSP 0 0 t tbO Motor speed Base reference S With LSP gt 0 LSP 228 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn rtr Init traverse ctrl Reinitialize traverse control This command can be assigned to a logic input or to a communication bus control word bit It rese
63. true R3 Active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments R3 Holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false R4 Assignment Identical to R2 see page 125 R4 Delay time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true R4 Active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments R4 Holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time c
64. 1 1 Slowdown frequency qo E Distance 1 Frequency Half floor with function Half floor The function is only activated if when the slowdown limit Switch is tripped the motor frequency is less than Half floor speed HLS Acceleration is then maintained up to this value prior to slowing down The final part of the path is identical to that of the standar Distance floor speed HLS Slowdown frequency Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Half floor speed Activation and adjustment of the half floor function This function has priority over all speed reference functions preset speeds for example with the exception of those generated via fault monitoring fallback speed for example No nO Function inactive 0 1 Hz to 500 0 Hz Activation of the function by adjusting the motor frequency to be reached prior to slowing down 236 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Direct power supply via DC bus This function is only accessible for ATV71eeeMG gt 18 5 kW ATV71eeeN4 gt 22 kW drives Direct power supply via the DC bus requires a protected direct current source with adequate power and voltage as well as a suitably dimensioned resistor and capacitor precharging contactor Consult Schneider Electric for information about specifying these components The direct power supply via DC bus function c
65. 2 2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 Begin Acc round tA1 The parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type rPt is Customized CUS 1 0 to 10096 1096 Begin Dec round Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as 96 of the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 dE2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 10096 The parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type rPt is Customized CUS End Dec round 1 Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 dE2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 Begin Dec round tA3 The parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type rPt is Customized CUS 10 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 159 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 0 to 500 or 599 Hz 4 Ramp 2 threshold according to rating Ramp switching threshold The 219 ramp is switched if the value of Frt is not 0 0 deactivates the function and the output frequency is greater than Frt Threshold ramp switching can be combined with Ramp switch ass rPS switching as follows LI or bit Frequency Ramp 0 Frt ACC dEC 0 gt Frt AC2 dE2 1 Frt AC2 dE2 1 gt Frt AC2 dE2
66. 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn The parameters in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and there is no run command except for parameters with a symbol in the code column which can be modified with the drive running or stopped Note Compatibility of functions The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I O and by the fact that some functions are incompatible with one another Functions that are not listed in the table below are fully compatible If there is an incompatibility between functions the first function configured will prevent the others being configured Each of the functions on the following pages can be assigned to one of the inputs or outputs A single input can activate several functions at the same time reverse and 2 ramp for example The user must therefore ensure that these functions can be used at the same time It is only possible to assign one input to several functions at Advanced AdU and Expert EPr levels Before assigning a command reference or function to an input or output the user must make sure that this input or output has not already been assigned and that another input or output has not been assigned to an incompatible or undesirable function The drive factory setting or macro configurations automatically configure functions which may prevent other functions being assigned It may be necessary to unconfigure one
67. 238 the parameter can be accessed only if an encoder card VW 411 has been inserted and if Encoder type EnS lt AABB AAbb New encoder parameter Stop on top Z tOSt page 238 Enhancements made to version V2 4 8383 in comparison to V1 9 5383 New parameters and function Menu 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun New sub menu ROLLBACK MGT rbM page 188 Menu can be accessed only for ATV71eeeM3X drives up to 45 kW and for ATV71eeeN4 drives up to 75 kW if Motor control type Ctt page 72 lt Sync CL FSY or FVC FUC if Brake assignment bLC page 181 is assigned New parameter of ROLLBACK MGT function Rollback MGT rbM page 188 Rbk Compensation rbC page 188 Rbk Damping rbd page 188 Enhancements made to version V2 8 S383 in comparison to V2 4 S383 Menu 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn The adjustment range Time to restart ttr page 183 can now be configured to 0 to 15 00 s Menu 7 DISPLAY CONFIG Addition in 7 4 KEYPAD PARAMETERS page 291 parameter Power up menu to choose the menu displayed on the drive on power up Enhancements made to version V3 4 8383 in comparison to V2 8 5383 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu New parameters and functions New parameter Regen connection Olr page 239 with this parameter it is possible to retun the braking energy to the mains New parameter Dis operat opt code dOtd page 61 AAV49426 0
68. 7 1 USER PARAMETERS 1 DRIVE MENU 1 3 SETTINGS Selection of 1 to 15 parameters Return std name 5 No ENTREES AS ar Ramp increment to be customized PARAMETER SELECTION 1 2 MONITORING ENT Acceleration CUSTOMIZED SELECTION 1 3 SETTINGS Deceleration USER MENU NAME 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL Acceleration 2 DEVICE NAME 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Deceleration 2 SERVICE MESSAGE CONFIGURATION 0 CONFIGURATION 1 Note The 15 line is PARAMETER SELECTION j CONFIGURATION 2 RDY Term 0 00 Hz OA depending on the path ENT or List la ATV SERIAL NUMBER y CUSTOMIZED SELECTION ENT List of customized parameters RDY Term 0 00Hz RDY Term 0 00Hz If no custom settings have Ramp increment ENT User name been made the standard value appears names units etc User name FLOW REFERENCE Display on 1 or 2 lines of characters Nb characters max 13 Offsets and coefficients are Use F1 to change to ABC abc 123 numerical values Do not use Use the navigation selector button to increment the character too high a multiplier 99999 alphabetical order and lt lt and gt gt F2 and F3 to switch to the max display next or previous character respectively ENT RDY Term 0 00Hz OA Term _ 0 00Hz gt Customized Standard use of the factory set Standard unit Customized LBS Customized customization of the unit Nb characters max
69. 78 for an asynchronous motor or Nominal freq sync FrSS page 87 for a synchronous motor and Rated motor volt UnS page 78 and by Evacuation Input V rSU above Example with an asynchronous motor If LSP FrS x rSU UnS rSP min LSP rSP max Frs x rSU UnS If LSP 2 FrS x rSU UnS rSP Frs x rSU UnS With a synchronous motor Same formula using FrSS in place of FrS and 400 V in place of UnS Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 235 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Half floor The half floor function is designed for elevator applications When an elevator sets off from floors and half floors the cycle time for half floors can be too long as the elevator does not have time to reach full speed before crossing the slowdown limit switch As a result the slowdown time is unnecessarily long The half floor function can be used to compensate this by not triggering slowdown until the speed reaches a preset threshold Half floor speed HLS in order that the final part of the path will be the same as for a standard floor The graphs below illustrate the various operating scenarios with and without the function Frequency 4 Standard floor A Slowdown limit switch reached B Stop limit switch reached Slowdown frequency 1 Distance B o T Frequency 4 Half floor without function 1
70. Adjustment range Factory setting 0 End Dec round 94 159 Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 dE2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 Begin Dec round tA3 LSP Low speed 0 Hz Motor frequency at minimum reference can be set between 0 and High speed HSP High speed Motor frequency at maximum reference be set between Low speed LSP and Max frequency tFr The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr 60Hz NEMA 60 CAUTION For permanent magnet synchronous motors the maximum permissible speed must not be exceeded otherwise demagnetization may occur The maximum speed permitted by the motor drive chain or application must not be exceeded at any time Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 0 2 to 1 5 In 1 According to drive Mot therm current duris Motor thermal protection current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate to 100096 4096 Speed prop gain This parameter can be accessed if Speed loop type SSL page 95 Standard Std Speed loop proportional gain Speed time integral 100 This parameter can be accessed if Speed loop type SSL page 95 Standard Std Speed loop integral time constant speed loop filter 0 to 100
71. C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted Min PID feedback 1 100 Value for minimum feedback Adjustment range from 0 to Max PID feedback PIF2 2 Max PID feedback 1 1000 Value for maximum feedback Adjustment range from Min PID feedback PIF 1 to 32767 2 Min PID reference 1 150 Minimum process value Adjustment range from Min PID feedback PIF 1 to Max PID reference 2 2 Max PID reference Maximum process value Adjustment range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID feedback PIF2 2 Act internal PID ref Ta Internal PID regulator reference No nO The PID regulator reference is given by Fr1 or Fr1b with summing subtraction multiplication functions see the diagram on page 139 Yes YES The PID regulator reference is internal via parameter rPI Internal PID ref 150 Internal PID regulator reference This parameter can also be accessed in the 1 2 MONITORING SUP menu Adjustment range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 2 0 01 to 100 1 1 900 PID prop gain Proportional gain 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 Paramete
72. CFG2 PARAMETER GROUP LIST Selection of menus to be loaded All ALL All parameters O Drive configuration drM The 1 DRIVE MENU menu without 1 9 COMMUNICATION and 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD In the 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu Return std name page 288 returns to No O Settings SEt The 1 3 SETTINGS menu without the IR compensation UFr Slip compensation SLP and Mot therm current parameters O Motor param MOt Motor parameters see list below The following selections can only be accessed if Config Source FCSI Macro Conf Inl Comm menu COM The 1 9 COMMUNICATION menu without either Scan In1 address nMA 1 to Scan In8 address nMA8 Scan Out1 address nCA1 to Scan Out8 address nCA8 Prog card menu PLC The 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD menu O Monitor config MOn The 6 MONITORING CONFIG menu Display config 915 The 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu See the multiple selection procedure on page 31 for the integrated display terminal and page 22 for the graphic display terminal Note In factory configuration and after a return to factory settings PARAMETER GROUP LIST will be empty Goto FACTORY SETTINGS It is only possible to revert to the factory settings if at least one group of parameters has previously been selected With the integrated display terminal No Yes The parameter changes back to nO automatically as soon as the operatio
73. Delay time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control 0 Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true R2 Active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments R2 Holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt Brk control DC charging 4 and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false AAV49426 04 2014 125 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting R3 Assignment Identical to R2 R3 Delay time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control 0 Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at O The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes
74. EMF constant in 0 1 mV per rpm or 1 mV per rpm peak voltage per phase according to the value of Increment EMF IPHS On the integrated display unit O to 9999 then 10 00 to 65 53 10000 to 65536 g Autotune L d axis 0 to 655 3 Acc to drive rating Axis d stator inductance in mH per phase This parameter is overwritten with the value measured during auto tuning operation if Tune Type tUnt is set to ALL ALL see page 86 On motors with smooth poles Autotune L d axis LdS Autotune L q axis LqS Stator inductance 0 to 655 3 Acc to drive rating Autotune L q axis Axis q stator inductance in mH per phase This parameter is overwritten with the value measured during auto tuning operation if Tune Type tUnt is set to ALL ALL see page 86 On motors with smooth poles Autotune L d axis LdS Autotune L q axis LqS Stator inductance 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate 84 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting SYNCHRONOUS MOTOI Auto tuning A A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR ARC FLASH During auto tuning the motor operates at rated current Do not service the motor during auto tuning Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury A WARNING LO
75. End EnDat encoder Hiperface SCHP Hiperface encoder SinCos SC SinCos encoder SSI SSI SSI encoder Undefined Und Encoder supply volt Rated voltage of encoder used The parameter can be accessed if Encoder protocol UECP is not Undefined Und Undefined Und Not defined 5 volts BU 5 Volts Only possible value if Encoder protocol UECP lt EnDat 2 1 End 8 volts 8U 8 Volts 12 volts 12U 12 Volts To make any changes to this parameter with the integrated display terminal press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s for the change to be taken into account When using the graphic display terminal confirmation is requested Sincos lines count und Number of lines This parameter can be accessed if Encoder protocol UECP lt SinCos SC Undefined Und Not defined 1to 10000 1 to 10 000 lines SSI parity Undefined Und Parity This parameter can be accessed if Encoder protocol UECP SSI SSI Undefined Und Not defined L1 No parity nO No parity O Odd parity Odd Odd parity O Even parity EUEn Even parity SSI frame size Undefined Und Frame length number of bits This parameter can be accessed if Encoder protocol UECP 551 SSI O Undefined Und Not defined Only possible value if SSI parity SSCP Undefined Und 10 to 27 10 to 25 if SSI parity SSCP No parity
76. H 5NIHO LINOM 1 ul 5 LH V LS LL Code Index of parameter codes LbC I CECE LbL3 LbF IL E qj LCE Ld5 LES IL IE ts LFA LFF LFL3 LFLY L 15 1 Ib DES LLE 101 10 Id LU IH LUIS 02 311 127 128 LU LOYWH 045 024 Loes 03 034 LOdFH 035 AAV49426 04 2014 Index of parameter codes Page 202 7 574 ISONILLAS AHOLOV J 01 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 61 NI NI NI 774 LN3IN39 VNVM 8 1 LONN Z1 e m N c 132 91 0 1 549 SLAdLNO SLNdNI 91 CER 10H1NOO HOLOM 87 435 soNILL3S H 1 ul 5 1915 LL Code Ldfs 19 5 iL e e 195 nLR3 nL RH nLH5 nLHb nLr nLr5 nL5
77. I O profile IO profile CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In profile profile can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In profile profile can be switched without logic inputs The function is active when the assigned input or bit is at 1 Example 2 wire control operation tCC 2C Motor Ramp Ramp frequency 1 DEC DE2 forced to 0 1 s Reference JGF reference 0 JGF reference LI JOG 1 0 Forward 4 1 0 HUT ll Reverse 4 oot 1 0 to 10 Hz Jog frequency 1 The parameter can be accessed if JOG JOG is not No nO Reference in jog operation Jog delay 1 010205 The parameter can be accessed if JOG JOG is not No nO Anti repeat delay between 2 consecutive jog operations 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 166 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Preset speeds 2 4 8 or 16 speeds can be preset requiring 1 2 3 or 4 logic inputs respectively Note You must configure 2 and 4 speeds in order to obtain 4 speeds You must configure 2 4 and 8 speeds in order to obtain 8 speeds You must configure 2 4 8 and 16 speeds in order to obtain 16 speeds Combination table for preset speed inputs
78. If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In profile can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In profile can be switched without logic inputs Ej i EJ fel o The stop is activated when the input or the bit changes to O If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active the motor will only restart if 2 3 wire control page 108 2 wire 2C and the 2 wire type tCt lt Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO If not a new run command must be sent No nO Fast stop assign Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 151 No nO Not assigned LI1 LI See the assignment conditions on page 145 The stop is activated when the input changes to 0 or the bit changes to 1 bit in I O profile IO at 0 If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active the motor will only restart if 2 3 wire control ECC page 108 2 wire 2C and the 2 wire type tCt Level
79. It displays all the functions associated with input 11 in order to check for example for compatibility problems LJ AH Type Voltage 10U O Voltage 100 Positive voltage input negative values are interpreted as zero the input is unidirectional Voltage n10U Positive and negative voltage input the input is bidirectional min value 0 to 10 0 V 0 to 10 0 V max value filter 010 10 00 5 Interference filtering AH Interm point X 0 to 10096 Input delinearization point coordinate 0 corresponds to 11 min value UIL1 100 corresponds to 11 max value UIH1 AH Interm point Y 0 to 100 Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference AAV49426 04 2014 113 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Al2 assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with input AI2 in order to check for example for compatibility problems Al2 Type Current 0 A O Voltage 100 Voltage input O Current 0 A Current input AI2 min value 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if AI2 Type Al2t Current 0 A 0 to 10 0 V 12 min value The parameter can be accessed if AI2 Type Al2t Voltage 100 0 to 20 0 mA 12 max value The
80. JESt x App Inertia Coef JACO 1 Parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Advice on setting the parameters in this menu can be found on pages 58 to 60 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 95 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Application Inertia This parameter can be accessed if Speed loop type SSL High perfor HPF The value of the actual inertia being driven must be entered in this parameter This value is then used by the drive to optimize speed loop settings thus achieving the best results provided that the exact value has been entered Application Inertia JAPL 7 Estim app inertia JESt x App Inertia Coef JACO with App Inertia Coef JACO 1 or 30 if Macro configuration CFG page 42 Lift LIFt and Motor control type Ctt page 72 Sync mot SYn or Sync CL FSY Increment given by Inertia Mult Coef JMUL 0 1 gm 1 gm 10 gm 100 gm or 1000 gm Note If a motor parameter is modified the estimated inertia is recalculated and updated parameters Estim app inertia JESt and Inertia Mult Coef JMUL Application Inertia JAPL is also returned to its default value according to the new value of Estim app inertia JESt A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION If an incorrect value is entered the Application Inertia
81. LI or a bit has not been assigned or if the assigned LI or bit is at 0 when a run command is sent fluxing occurs when the motor starts 1 Parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 91 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Angle setting type Toe ere Rotor angle alignment or detection mode can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 7 Sync mot SYn Mode for measuring the phase shift angle between the motor and the encoder O With load brC Detection of angle without motion possible with or without load brake engaged or released W o load nLd Alignment with motion only for free motors brake released without load Optimised brCO Measurement without motion possible with or without load brake engaged or released Optimization of the angle detection time starting from the second detection request even after a power off of the product Note 1 If Angle setting type ASt W o load nLd the motor may rotate one full revolution during measurement Nota 2 If Motor control type Ctt lt Sync mot SYn or Sync CL FSY then Angle setting type ASt Optimised brCO 92 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Auto tuning A A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR A
82. MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD Simplified menu for a quick start Visualization of current motor and input output values Accesses the adjustment parameters which can be modified during operation Motor parameters motor nameplate auto tuning switching frequency control algorithms etc configuration scaling filtering 2 wire control 3 wire control etc Configuration of command and reference channels graphic display terminal terminals bus etc Configuration of application functions e g preset speeds PID brake logic control etc Configuration of fault management Communication parameters fieldbus Motor drive diagnostics Identifies the drive and the internal options Access to configuration files and return to factory settings Specific menu set up by the user in the 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu Configuration of optional Controller Inside card 28 AAV49426 04 2014 Integrated display terminal Low power Altivar 71 drives see catalog feature an integrated display terminal with a 7 segment 4 digit display The graphic display terminal described on the previous pages can also be connected to these drives as an option Functions of the display and the keys 2 Modbus status LEDs Four 7 segment 2 CANopen status LEDs displays Exits a menu or parameter or aborts the displayed value to return to the previous value in the memory Returnstothe previous See menu or parameter or
83. OFF The OFF OFF value signifies that the card pairing function is inactive The ON On value signifies that card pairing is active and that an access code must be entered in order to start the drive in the event of a card pairing fault As soon as the code has been entered the drive is unlocked and the code changes to ON On The PPI code is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support 264 AAV49426 04 2014 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting _ Fallback speed 0 to 599 Hz Selection of the fallback speed Ramp divider o The ramp that is enabled dEC or dE2 is then divided by this coefficient when stop requests are sent Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time g DC inject level 1 0 1 to 1 41 In 2 0 64 In 2 Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage DC injection time 1 vus Maximum current injection time DC inject level 1 IdC After this time the injection current becomes DC inject level 2 IdC2 DC inject level 2 o E pare TIVI Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode once period of time DC injection time 1 tdl has elapsed
84. Reference multiplication 155 B S ramps 158 Jog operation 166 Preset speeds 167 speed speed using single action pushbuttons 170 1 step speed speed using double action pushbuttons 170 2 steps speed around a reference 172 Save reference 174 Inspection 234 AAV49426 04 2014 Application functions Application specific functions Fast stop 162 Limit switch management 175 gl Brake control B El Load measurement 189 B High speed hoisting 191 Rope slack 194 PID regulator 196 Torque monitoring 205 m Motor generator torque limit 208 g Load sharing 104 Bg B Line contactor control 212 Output contactor control 214 Positioning by limit switches or sensors 216 El Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch 218 El ENA system mechanical with unbalanced load 99 Parameter switching 221 B Motor or configuration switching 224 E Traverse control 227 Stop configuration 162 E Evacuation 236 Half floor 236 Rollback management 188 AAV49426 04 2014 Application functions Safety functions fault management Power Removal safety function see User s Manual El a El Deferred stop on thermal alarm 251 Alarm handling 136 El gl B Fault management 242 to 265 B
85. StA and FreqLoopGain FLG see page 60 5 Tooptimize ramp following increase the feedforward parameter Feed forward FFP as indicated on the next page until the best result is obtained 6 Under exceptional circumstances the feedforward term bandwidth can be adjusted as shown on the next page to further improve ramp following or to reduce the speed reference s sensitivity to noise A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION f an incorrect value is entered in the Application Inertia JAPL parameter page 96 it can cause speed instability and loss of motor control which could lead to a sudden drop in hoisting and lift applications for example The inertia may vary significantly according to the application in general it is very high for lifts As such the default value does not guarantee correct operation It is essential to determine and enter the exact inertia value in high performance speed loop mode Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury AAV49426 04 2014 97 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC High performance speed loop Setting the Feed forward FFP and Bandwidth feedfor FFU parameters Feed forward FFP This is used to adjust the level of dynamic torque feedforward required for accelerating and decelerating the inertia The effect of this parameter on ramp following is illustrated below Increasing the value of FFP allows the ramp to be followed mo
86. Switching freq SFr is less than 2 kHz Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss fault mode if this has been enabled see page 249 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect CAUTION OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating requirements in determining the current limit Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1 Parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 75 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Selecting the encoder Follow the recommendations in the catalog and the Installation Manual Note 1 When an encoder is used with a VW3 A3 408 or VW3 A3 409 card it is only possible to configure the encoder input for ee speed feedback Functions can only be configured as references or inputs with a VW3 A3 401 to 407 and VW3 A3 411 card Note 2 When an encoder is used with a VW3 A3 409 card the drive remains locked in stop mode and displays nSt if the encoder is not fully configured Encoder check proc
87. These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 68 AAV49426 04 2014 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Adjustment range Factory setting li tE M 4 O Quick step Low 7 F freq See page 232 Current threshold 0 to 1 5 In 1 In 1 Current threshold for attained CtA function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 124 J High torque thd 300 to 300 100 High current threshold for High tq att ttHA function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 124 as a of the rated motor torque J Low torque thd 300 to 300 50 Low current threshold for Low tq att ttLA function assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 124 as a of the rated motor torque These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming AAV49426 04 2014 69 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Pul
88. This configuration is the only one possible if AI3 min value CrL3 page 115 is not greater than 3 mA Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 162 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 108 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 151 4 20mA loss Ignore nO Ignore nO Fault ignored This configuration is the only one possible if 14 min value CrL4 page 116 is not greater than 3 mA or if 14 Type Al4t page 116 Voltage 100 Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to config
89. V Al4 min value The parameter can be accessed if Al4 Type Al4t Voltage 100 0 to 20 0 mA Al4 max value The parameter can be accessed if Al4 Type Al4t Current 0 A 0 to 10 0 V Al4 max value The parameter can be accessed if Al4 Type Al4t Voltage 100 14 filter O to 10 00 s Interference filtering Al4 range 0 100 POS O 0 100 POS Unidirectional input 100 nEG Bidirectional input Example On a 0 10 V input corresponds to reference 100 5 V corresponds to reference 0 10 V corresponds to reference 100 Al4 Interm point X 0 to 100 Input delinearization point coordinate 0 corresponds to Min value if the range is 0 100 Max value Min value 096 corresponds to 2 if the range is 100 10096 10096 corresponds to Max value Al4 Interm point Y 0 to 10096 Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference 116 AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Al net channel Virtual input This parameter can also be accessed in the PID REGULATOR Pld submenu page 200 No nO Not assigned in this case the virtual input does not appear in the analog input assignment parameters for the functions L1 Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus O CANopen CAn
90. a power outage Operation in the opposite direction is authorized at high speed The slowdown command is deleted on a falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the input or bit assigned to forward slowdown if this falling edge occurs in reverse operation A bit or a logic input can be assigned to disable this function Although forward slowdown is disabled while the disable input or bit is at 1 sensor changes continue to be monitored and saved 216 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Example Positioning on a limit switch on rising edge T T T E Reverse Reverse Forward Forward stop slowdown Reverse Forward slowdown stop Operation with short cams In this instance when operating for the first time or after restoring the factory settings the drive must initially be started outside the slowdown and stop zones in order to initialize the function Forward slowdown zone Forward slowdown Forward stop zone Forward stop N Operation with long cams In this instance there is no restriction which means that the function is initialized across the whole trajectory Forward slowdown zone n Forward slowdown Forward stop zone Forward stop MG AAV49426 04 2014 217 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch This function can be used to control
91. accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 3 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr page 158 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 202 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Low speed time out bond Maximum operating time at Low speed LSP see page 45 Following operation at LSP for a defined period a motor stop is requested automatically The motor restarts if the reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present Caution Value 0 corresponds to an unlimited period Note If Low speed time out 15 is not 0 Type of stop Stt page 162 is forced to Ramp stop rMP only if a ramp stop can be configured PID wake up thresh 0 0 to 100 0 0 If the PID and Low speed operating time tLS functions are configured at the same time the PID regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than LSP This results in unsatisfactory operation which consists of starting operating at low speed then stopping and so on Parameter rSL restart error threshold can be used to set a minimum PID error threshold for restarting after a stop at prolonged LSP The function is in
92. activated startup in the other direction is authorized Example 1 Reverse Reverse Forward stop Forward stop The stop is activated when the input is at O contact open AAV49426 04 2014 175 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Stop FW limit sw No nO No nO Function inactive L11 LI1 to LI6 LI7 LI7 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In profile IO can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In profile IO can be switched without logic inputs Stop RV limit sw No nO Same assignments possible as for Stop FW limit sw LAF below Ej Ej El o Stop type Freewheel nSt O Ramp stop rMP O Fast stop FSt Freewheel nSt When the assigned input changes to 0 the stop is controlled in accordance with the selected type Restarting is only authorize
93. active front end Parameter Dec ramp adapt brA is set to nO to inactivate this function Parameter Brake res fault Mgt DUb has to be set to ignore nO for HHP range only Parameter Deceleration dEC has to be increased for applications with high inertia to avoid overload of Active Front End This can be prevented also by rounding the deceleration ramp with parameter Begin Dec round tA3 Parameter 2 wire type tCt has to be set on Level LEL to ensure an automatic restart after undervoltage detection of the Active Front End An automatic restart is only possible on 2 wire control The integrated RFI filter has to be always deactivated position IT non grounded mains for ATV 71 inverter and also for the Active Infeed Converter AIC because there exists no direct mains connection AFE ATV61 71 RFI Filter RFI Filter RFI Filter RFI Filter must RFI Filter must AFE Active Front End TN TT ES always be set to always be set to AIC Active Infeed Converter ungrounded ungrounded LFM Line Filter Module position SK position gt 0 LFC Line Filter Choke A o 240 AAV49426 04 2014 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt With graphic display terminal Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG RDY Term 0
94. appearing in a different order and some grouped under submenus to simplify configuration The new submenus are as follows ENCODER FEEDBACK EnS page 77 ASYNC MOTOR ASY page 78 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR SYn page 83 ANGLE TEST SETTING ASA page 89 FLUXING BY LI FLI page 91 AUTOMATIC TUNE tUn page 93 SPEED LOOP SSL page 95 New parameters Boost DOO page 101 Action Boost FAb page 101 Increment EMF IPHS page 84 Read motor param rEqP page 86 Status motor param rEtP page 86 Angle setting type ASt pages 89 and 92 Angle auto test ASL page 89 Angle setting activ AtA page 90 Angle setting status AStS page 90 Speed loop type SSL page 95 Inertia Mult Coef JMUL page 95 Estim app inertia JESt page 95 Application Inertia JAPL page 96 Fr Loop Stab StA page 96 FreqLoopGain FLG page 96 Feed forward FFP page 97 Bandwidth feedfor FFU page 97 Parameters moved from menu 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun Motor fluxing FLU page 91 Fluxing assignment FLI page 91 Auto tune assign tUL page 93 Menu 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS New encoder parameters Encoder protocol UECP page 122 Encoder supply volt UECU page 122 Sincos lines count UELC page 122 SSI parity SSCP page 122 SSI frame size SSFS page 122 Nbr of revolution EnMr page 122 Turn
95. assigned No drive flt FLt Drive not faulty relay normally energized and de energized if there is a fault Drv running rUn Drive running Freq Th attain FtA Frequency threshold attained Freq threshold Ftd page 70 HSP attain FLA High speed attained I attained CtA Current threshold attained Current threshold Ctd page 69 Freq ref att SrA Frequency reference attained Th mot att tSA Motor 1 thermal state attained PID error al PEE PID error alarm PID fdbk al PFA PID feedback alarm 12 Al 4 20 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input A12 Freq Th 2 attain F2A Frequency threshold 2 attained Freq threshold 2 F2d page 70 att tAd Drive thermal state attained Rope slack rSdA Rope slack see Rope slack config rSd parameter page 195 High tq att ttHA Motor torque overshooting high threshold High torque thd page 69 Low tq 1 Motor torque undershooting low threshold Low torque thd ttL page 69 Forward MFrd Motor in forward rotation Reverse MrrS Motor in reverse rotation Th mot2 att 152 Motor 2 thermal state attained Th mot3 att 153 Motor 3 thermal state attained Drive start Strt 1 A run order has been receveid 0 A stop order has been receveid Neg Torque AtS Negative torque braking Cnfg O act Configuration 0 active Cnfg 1 act CnF1 Config
96. be accessed in vector control profiles Motor control type Ctt page 72 SVC U SVC I FVC FUC Sync mot SYn or Sync CL FSY if Speed loop type SSL page 95 Standard Std and if ENA system EnA page 100 lt Non nO The factory settings are suitable for most applications General case Setting for speed loop filter SFC 0 The regulator is an IP type with filtering of the speed reference for applications requiring flexibility and stability hoisting or high inertia for example Speed prop gain SPG affects excessive speed Speed time integral SIt affects the passband and response time Initial response Reduction in SIT w Reduction in SIT Reference division Reference division Reference division 4 4 4 1 1 1 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 2 0 2 0 2 2 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 b 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 d 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Time in ms Time in ms Initial response Increase in SPG Increase in SPG 47 Reference division Reference division Reference division 4 1 1 1 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 4 04 04 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 gt 0 0 gt 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Time in ms Time in ms 58 AAV49426 04 2014 1 3 SETTINGS SEt
97. been assigned to a logic input this input must be set to 1 active at 0 Measurement takes priority over any run commands which will be taken into account after the measurement sequence If measurement fails the drive displays No nO and changes to Angle Error ASF fault mode Measurement may take several seconds Do not interrupt the process Wait for the display to change to Done dOnE or No nO Note Ifa line contactor or output contactor function has been configured the contactor closes during measurement Angle auto test No Measurement of the phase shift angle between the motor and encoder by means of a logic input or command bit L1 No nO Not assigned O L11 1 See the assignment conditions on page 145 Measurement is performed when the assigned bit or input changes to 1 Note If a line contactor or output contactor function has been configured the contactor closes during measurement AAV49426 04 2014 89 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Angle setting activ Activation of automatic measurement of the phase shift angle between the motor and encoder when using a relative encoder incremental or SinCos L1 No nO Function inactive Power On POn Measurement is performed on each power up 1 Run order AUtO Measurement is performed on each run command if necessary i e if parameter Angle offset
98. can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC 7 Yes YES Operation Note When Motor control type Ctt page 72 lt FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY Auto DC inj level 1 SdC1 Auto DC inj level 2 SdC2 and Auto DC inj time 2 tdC2 cannot be accessed only Auto DC inj t time 1 tdC1 can be accessed This then corresponds to a zero speed maintenance time Run command Speed 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 165 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting JOG Pulse operation The JOG function is only active if the command channel and the reference channels are on the terminals Selecting the assigned logic input or bit activates the function No nO Not assigned L11 LI1 to LI6 LI6 LI7 LI7 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 1114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO profile C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO profile C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO profile C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in
99. card configured on a drive with a different rating the drive locks in Incorrect config CFF fault mode on power up If the card has been deliberately changed the fault can be cleared by pressing the ENT key twice which causes all the factory settings to be restored AAV49426 04 2014 299 User settings tables Menu 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Code Name Factory setting Customer setting 2 3 wire control 2 wire 2C Macro configuration Start Stop StS Standard mot freq 50 Hz 50 Rated motor power According to drive rating Rated motor volt According to drive rating Rated mot current According to drive rating Rated motor freq 50 Hz Rated motor speed According to drive rating Max frequency 60 Hz Output Ph rotation ABC Mot therm current According to drive rating Acceleration 3 0s Deceleration 3 0s Low speed 0 High speed Functions assigned to I O Inputs Functions assigned Inputs Functions assigned Outputs Outputs LI1 LO1 LI2 LO2 LI3 LO3 14 104 LI5 LIG Al2 LI7 Al3 LI8 Al4 LI9 R1 LI10 R2 LI11 R3 LI12 R4 LI13 RP LI14 Encoder 300 AAV49426 04 2014 User settings tables Other para meters table to be created by the user Code Name Customer setting Code Name Customer setting
100. configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 70 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC With graphic display terminal 0A Term 0 00Hz U 1 1 SIMPLY START RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 2 MONITORING MAIN MENU 1 3 SETTINGS 1 DRIVE MENU 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL Standard mot freq 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Code lt lt gt gt Quick Code Quick With integrated display terminal Power up AAV49426 04 2014 71 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC The parameters in the 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present with the following exceptions Auto tuning tUn page 93 and Angle auto test ASA page 89 which can cause the motor to start up Parameters containing the sign in the code column which can be modified with the drive running or stopped Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Standard mot freq 50Hz IEC 50 IEC 60Hz NEMA 60 NEMA This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters High speed HSP page 57 Freq threshold Ftd page 70 Rated motor volt UnS page 78 Rated motor freq FrS page 78 and Max frequency tFr page 73 Motor control type SVC V UUC O SVC V UUC Open loop voltage flux vector control with autom
101. control to the selected channel Command and reference via the display terminal are impossible if the latter is connected to more than one drive The JOG preset speed and speed functions can only be accessed if Profile CHCF Not separ SIM The preset PID reference functions can only be accessed if Profile CHCF Not separ SIM or Separate SEP The T K command via the display terminal can be accessed regardless of the Profile CHCF Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting F1 key assignment No Not assigned Jog JOG operation drive drive run command Only operates if Ref 1 channel Fr1 lt HMI LCC Does not operate with the T K function run command Only operates if Ref 1 channel Fr1 lt HMI LCC Does not operate with the T K function Press STOP to stop the drive Press the key to run the drive and decrease the speed Press STOP to stop the drive T K Command via the display terminal takes priority over switching CCS and over Ref 2 switching rFC EU E F2 key assignment PID ref 2 Sets a PID reference equal to the 219 preset PID reference Preset ref PID 2 rP2 page 204 without sending a PID ref 3 Sets a PID reference equal to the epe preset PID reference Preset ref PID 3 rP3 page 204 without sending a speed Slower only operates if Ref 2 channel Fr2 HMI LCC and if a di
102. corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 195 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn PID regulator Block diagram The function is activated by assigning an analog input to the PID feedback measurement Restart error Error threshold Auto id J E inversion wake up Manual Internal TENUTI SEEN Ea 222 PAL reference AC2 Pl YES no d iHrSL i 1 i 1 M TI E Reference A NE Pages 140 Gains Pages and 141 140 and 141 P Preset PID references AH i Predictive Ramps ve Scaling speed reference ACC DEC RP PS PIP1 PIP2 PST Encoder Network Al PID Preset manual references feedback Manual nO reference Parameter The black rectangle represents factory setting assignment 1 1 Ramp 2 is only active when the PID function starts up and during PID wake ups PID feedback The PID feedback must be assigned to one of the analog inputs to Al4 to the frequency input or the encoder according to whether any extension cards have been inserted PID reference The PID reference must be assigned to the following parameters
103. current Sinus filter is forced to No nO on ATV71e037M3 and ATV71e075N4 Note The settings for Current Limitation CLI and Limit 2 value CL2 page 63 must be made once Sinus filter OFI has been set to Yes YES and Motor control type Ctt page 72 has been set to V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 This is due to the fact that for certain ratings this configuration will result in a reduced factory setting 1 36 In for current limitations CAUTION If Sinus filter Yes YES Max frequency tFr page 43 must not exceed 100 Hz Up to 45 kW 60 HP for ATV71eeeM3X and 75 kW 100 HP for ATV71eeeN4 Motor control type Ctt page 72 must be V F 2pts UF2 V F 5pts UF5 or SVC V UUC only Atand above 55 kW 75 HP for ATV71eeeM3X and 90 kW 120 HP for ATV71eeeN4 Motor control type Ctt page 72 must be V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 only Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage According to rating According to rating Switching freq Switching frequency setting Adjustment range This can vary between 1 and 16 kHz but the minimum and maximum values as well as the factory setting can be limited in accordance with the type of drive ATV71H or W the rating and the configuration of the Sinus filter and Motor surge limit SUL parameters page 102 If Sinus filter OFI 2 YES YES and if the caliber is 69
104. example in order to indicate the cause of the stop Fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed at the time the fault occurred as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 262 AAV49426 04 2014 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting DB res protection L1 No nO No braking resistor protection thereby preventing access to the other function parameters Alarm YES Alarm The alarm may be assigned to a logic output or a relay see page 124 Fault FLt Switch to fault DOF with locking of drive freewheel stop Note The thermal state of the resistor can be displayed on the graphic display terminal It is calculated for as long as the drive control remains connected to the power supply 2 DB Resistor Power This parameter can be accessed if DB res protection brO is not nO Rated power of the resistor used g DB Resistor value 0 1 to 200 ohms 0 1 ohms This parameter can be accessed if DB res protection brO is not No nO Rated value of the braking resistor in o
105. external 24 V source Example circuit Note The Run Reset button must be pressed once the Emergency stop button has been released stop 4 7 3 Run Reset Lle Run command Forward or Reverse LO Re Line contactor ass LLC Lin Drive lock LES CAUTION This function can only be used for a small number of consecutive operations with a cycle time longer than 60 s in order to avoid premature aging of the filter capacitor charging circuit Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 212 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Line contactor ass Logic output or control relay No nO Function not assigned in this case none of the function parameters can be accessed LO1 LO1 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted dO1 dO 1 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment AO1 page 132 7 No nO Drive lock No nO L1 No nO Function inactive L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 The drive locks when the assigned input or bit changes to 0
106. falls back below 9090 Drv therm state al TU Trip threshold for drive thermal alarm logic output or relay Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 250 AAV49426 04 2014 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Deferred stop on thermal alarm This function is designed in particular for elevator applications It prevents the elevator stopping between two floors if the drive or motor overheats by authorizing operation until the next stop At the next stop the drive is locked until the thermal state falls back to a value which undershoots the set threshold by 2096 Example A trip threshold set at 8096 enables reactivation at 6096 One thermal state threshold must be defined for the drive and one thermal state threshold for the motor s which will trip the deferred stop Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Thermal alarm stop L1 No nO Function inactive in this case the following parameters cannot be accessed Yes YES Freewheel stop on drive or motor thermal alarm CAUTION RISK OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE The drive and motor are no longer protected in the event of thermal alarm stops This invalidates the warranty Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk Failure to follow this instruction can
107. fly performed even if this function has not been configured This configuration is not possible for ATV71eeeM3X 2 55 kW 75 HP and for ATV71eeeN4 gt 90 kW 120 HP if Motor control type Ctt page 72 Sync mot SYn or Sync CL FSY Note Output phase loss OPL is forced to No nO if Motor control type Ctt page 72 Sync mot SYn For other Motor control type Ctt configurations Output phase loss OPL is forced to Yes YES if brake logic control is configured see page 181 OutPh time detect ous bes Time delay for taking the Output Phase Loss OPL fault into account According to drive rating Input phase loss Ignore nO Fault ignored to be used when the drive is supplied a single phase supply or by DC bus Freewheel YES Fault with freewheel stop If one phase disappears the drive switches to fault mode Input phase loss IPL but if 2 or 3 phases disappear the drive continues to operate until it trips on an undervoltage fault Factory setting Ignore nO for ATV71e037M3 to U30M3 Freewheel YES for all others Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 249 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Overtemp fault mgt Freewheel YES Behavior in the event of the drive overheating O Ignore nO Fault ignored CAUTIO
108. if so use W o load nLd mode This occurs when using low inductance motors high speed motors or motors in which the rated voltage is well below the supply voltage of the drive n some cases the measurement can cause tripping on an Angle error ASF fault This occurs if the motor rotor has moved during measurement only detected in closed loop mode a motor phase is disconnected the motor inductance is too high thus limiting the measurement current in this case use W o load nLd mode Angle setting type ASt Optimised brCO measurement without motion possible with or without load brake engaged or released Optimization of the angle detection time starting from the second detection request even after a power off of the product 1 First follow the Encoder check procedure on page 76 2 Set Motor control type Ctt lt Sync CL FSY 3 If you have selected Angle setting type ASt W o load nLd measurement without motion check that the motor is running safely and can turn freely without resistive or driving torque If these conditions are not met the resulting measurement will be inaccurate 4 Set Angle auto test ASA Yes YES The measurement is performed and Angle auto test ASA changes to Done dOnE The Angle offset value ASU parameter changes from No nO to a numerical value proportional to the electrical angle measured 8191 360 5 If required configure automa
109. integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In profile IO can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In profile IO can be switched without logic inputs Assignment of the reverse direction command 000000 ELE ELE 108 AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting AJ assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions that are assigned to input LI1 in order to check for multiple assignments On Delay 0 to 200 ms 0 This parameter is used to take account of the change of the logic input to state 1 with a delay that can be adjusted between 0 and 200 milliseconds in order to filter out possible interference The change to state 0 is taken into account without delay A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that the delay set does not pose a risk or lead to undesired operation The relative order in which these inputs are taken into account may be modified according to the delay values of the various logic inputs and thus lead to unintended operation Failure to follow these instructions can
110. is sent following torque application No nO Brake does not engage at regulated zero speed 0 0 to 30 0 s Brake engage delay once zero speed is reached 0 to 5 00 5 0 Brake engage delay 1 Time delay before request to engage brake To delay brake engagement if you wish the brake to be engaged when the drive comes to a complete stop Brake engage time 1 0 to 5 00 s Brake engage time brake response time 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 182 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Auto DC inj level 1 0 to 1 2 In 2 Level of standstill DC injection current Note The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 is not FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY and if Movement type bSt page 181 is Traveling HOr CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Engage at reversal L1 No nO The brake does not engage Yes YES The brake engages Can be used to select whether or not the brake engages on transition to zero speed when the operati
111. items are access protected Return to factory settings 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu The channels and parameters protected by the 1 13 USER MENU as well as the menu itself The custom display settings 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu AAV49426 04 2014 281 4 PASSWORD COd Name Description Adjustment range E Status Unlocked ULC Information parameter cannot be modified Locked LC The drive is locked by a password O Unlocked ULC The drive is not locked by a password g PIN code 1 OFF to 9999 OFF OFF 19 access code The value OFF OFF indicates that no password has been set Unlocked The value ON On indicates that the drive is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it Once the correct code has been entered it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply is disconnected PIN code 1 is a public unlock code 6969 LJ PIN code 2 OFF to 9999 OFF OFF Parameter can only be accessed in Expert mode 219 access code The value OFF OFF indicates that no password has been set Unlocked The value ON On indicates that the drive is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it Once the correct code has been entered it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply is disconnected PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to Schneider Elect
112. may be assigned to a logic output or a relay Yes YES Fault monitored Load slip detection Sdd is forced to Yes YES if Motor control type Ctt page 72 FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY The fault is triggered by comparison with the ramp output and the speed feedback and is only effective for speeds greater than 1096 of the Rated motor freq FrS see page 78 In the event of a fault the drive will switch to a freewheel stop and if the brake logic control function has been configured the brake command will be set to 0 Encoder coupling Digi L1 No nO Fault not monitored Yes YES Fault monitored If the brake logic control function has been configured the factory setting changes to Yes YES Encoder coupling ECC Yes YES is only possible if Load slip detection Sdd Yes YES and Motor control type Ctt page 72 FVC FUC Sync CL FSY and Brake assignment bLC page 181 is not No nO The fault monitored is the break in the mechanical coupling of the encoder In the event of a fault the drive will switch to a freewheel stop and if the brake logic control function has been configured the brake command will be set to 0 Encoder check time 210 10s 2s Encoder faults filtering time The parameter can be accessed if Encoder coupling ECC Yes YES limit stop Ignore nO Behavior in the event of switching to torque or
113. message will appear With the graphic display terminal Term 0 00 2 INCOMPATIBILITY The function can t be assigned because an incompatible function is already selected See programming book ENT or ESC to continue With the integrated display terminal COMP flashes until ENT or ESC is pressed When you assign a logic input an analog input a reference channel or a bit to a function pressing the HELP button will display the functions that may already have been activated by this input bit or channel AAV49426 04 2014 153 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn When a logic input an analog input a reference channel or a bit that has already been assigned is assigned to another function the following screens appear With the graphic display terminal RUN 50 00Hz 1250 50 00Hz WARNING ASSIGNED TO Ref 2 switching ENT gt Continue ESC gt Cancel If the access level permits this new assignment pressing ENT confirms the assignment If the access level does not permit this new assignment pressing ENT results in the following display RUN 50 00Hz 1250A 50 00Hz ASSIGNMENT FORBIDDEN Un assign the present functions or select Advanced access level With the integrated display terminal The code for the first function which is already assigned is displayed flashing If the access level permits this new assignment pressing ENT confirms the assignment If the access level does not per
114. page 22 Quick Quick navigation see page 26 The function keys are dynamic and contextual Other functions application functions can be assigned to these keys via the 1 6 COMMAND menu If a preset speed is assigned to a function key and if the function hey is pressed the motor will run at this preset speed until another preset speed or JOG is pressed speed reference is changed or Stop key is pressed 5 Indicates that there are no more levels below this display window wp Indicates that there are more levels below this display window 6 Indicates that this display window does not scroll further up Indicates that there are more levels above this display window 20 AAV49426 04 2014 Graphic display terminal Drive state codes ACC Acceleration CLI Current limit CTL Controlled stop on input phase loss DCB DC injection braking in progress DEC Deceleration FLU Motor fluxing in progress FST Fast stop NLP Control is powered on but the DC bus is not loaded NST Freewheel stop OBR Auto adapted deceleration PRA Power Removal function active drive locked RDY Drive ready RUN Drive running SOC Controlled output cut in progress TUN Auto tuning in progress USA Undervoltage alarm ASA Measurement of the phase shift angle in progress CC Configuration encoder incorrect AAV49426 04 2014 Graphic display terminal
115. page 84 Pole pairs PPnS page 84 Syn EMF constant PHS page 84 Cust stator R syn rSAS page 85 Autotune L d axis LdS page 84 and Autotune L q axis LqS page 84 Note During loading the drive is in Freewheel Stop state with the motor turned off contactor or output contactor function has been configured the contactor closes during loading Not done tAb Status motor param Can only be accessed if Encoder protocol UECP page 122 7 Hiperface SCHP Information on the request to load motor parameters from the encoder EEPROM memory not modifiable Not done tAb Loading has not been performed default motor parameters will be used In Progress PrOG Loading in progress Failed FAIL Loading has failed Done dOnE Loading completed successfully Customized CUS Loading completed successfully but one or more motor parameters have subsequently been modified by the user via the display terminal or serial link or auto tuning has been performed by Auto tuning tUn Tune Type This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 Sync mot SYn Sync CL FSY up to 45 kW 60HP for ATV71eeeM3X and 75 kW 100 HP for ATV71eeeN4 Define the motor parameters that will be measured during auto tuning operation rS rS Only cold stator resistance is measured during the auto tuning operation ALL ALL Cold stator res
116. parameters described on page 192 is used to measure the load The effective measurement cycle will not be triggered until the load reaches the adjustable threshold rStL which corresponds to the weight of the hook A logic output or a relay can be assigned to the indication of the rope slack state in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu 194 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting High speed hoisting No nO Function inactive Speed SSO Speed reference mode I Limit CSO Current limitation mode 0 to 100 Motor speed coeff Speed reduction coefficient calculated by the drive for Ascending direction The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO 7 Speed ref SSO 0 to 100 Gen speed coeff Speed reduction coefficient calculated by the drive for Descending direction The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO is not No nO 0 1sto65s Load measuring tm Duration of speed step for measurement The parameter can b2e accessed if High speed hoisting HSO is not No nO 0 to FrS or FrSS 1 Measurement spd Speed stabilized for measurement The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO is not No nO High speed Limit 0 to 1 65 In 2 Current limitation at high speed The parameter can be a
117. performed according to the Type of stop Stt page 162 irrespective of the configuration of Stop Key priority PSt LI Profile Not separ SIM O 8 serie SE8 ATV58 interchangeability see Migration Manual The 8 serie SE8 configuration is used to load via PC Software for example an ATV58 drive configuration in an ATV71 that has already been to this configuration This assignment cannot be accessed if a Controller Inside card has been inserted Note Modifications to the configuration of the ATV71 must only be made using PC Software when it is in this configuration otherwise operation cannot be guaranteed Not separ SIM Reference and command not separate Separate SEP Separate reference and command This assignment cannot be accessed in I O profile 10 I O profile IO profile When 8 serie SE8 is selected and I O profile IO is deselected the drive automatically returns to the factory setting this is mandatory This factory setting only affects the 1 DRIVE MENU menu It does not affect either 1 9 COMMUNICATION or 1 5 PROGRAMMABLE CARD With the graphic display terminal a screen appears to perform this operation Follow the instructions on the screen With the integrated display terminal press ENT and hold it down for 2 s This will save the selection and return to the factory setting 146 AAV49426 04 2014 1 6 COMMAND CtL Name Description Ad
118. result in death or serious injury All the logic inputs available on the drive are processed as in the example for 111 above up to LI6 1110 or 1114 depending on whether or not option cards have been inserted AAV49426 04 2014 109 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Configuration of analog inputs and Pulse input The minimum and maximum input values in volts mA etc are converted to 96 in order to adapt the references to the application Minimum and maximum input values The minimum value corresponds to a reference of 096 and the maximum value to a reference of 10096 The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value Reference Reference 4 10096 10096 1 1 1 1 Current or 1 1 1 1 1 Current or voltage or voltage or frequency frequency 0 input 0 input Min value Max value 20 mA or Max value Min value 20 mA or CrLx or CrHx or 10 V or CrHx or CrLx or 10V ULx or PIL PFr 30 00 kHz UHx or PFr ULxorPIL 30 00 kHz For bidirectional inputs the min and max are relative to the absolute value for example 2 to 8 V Negative min value of Pulse input Reference 4 100 1 Frequency 5 t gt input 30 00 RP min 0 RP max value 30 00 kHz value PFr kHz PIL Range output values For analog inputs only This parameter is used to configure the reference range to 096 100
119. result in equipment damage 010 30 5 Auto DC inj time 2 219 standstill injection time This parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC page 164 Yes YES Operation Note When Motor control type Ctt page 72 lt FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY Auto DC inj level 1 SdC1 Auto DC inj level 2 SdC2 and Auto DC inj time 2 tdC2 are not accessible Only Auto DC inj time 1 tdC1 can be accessed This then corresponds to a zero speed maintenance time 2 t command 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate 62 AAV49426 04 2014 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LE E Switching freq According to rating According to rating Switching frequency setting Adjustment range This can vary between 1 and 16 kHz but the minimum and maximum values as well as the factory setting can be limited in accordance with the type of drive ATV71H or W the rating and the configuration of the Sinus filter OF and Motor surge limit SUL parameters page 102 If Sinus filter OFI 2 YES YES and if the caliber is 690 V the minimum Switching freq SFr value is 2 5 kHz otherwise the minimum Switching freq SFr value is 4 0 kHz If the value is less
120. result in equipment damage 0 to 11896 Drv therm state al Thermal state threshold of the drive tripping the deferred stop Motor therm level Thermal state threshold of the motor tripping the deferred stop Motor2 therm level 0 to 118 Thermal state threshold of the motor 2 tripping the deferred stop Motor3 therm level 0 to 118 Thermal state threshold of the motor 3 tripping the deferred stop Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 251 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting External fault ass No nO Function inactive O L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 If the assigned bit is at 0 there is no external fault If the assigned bit is at 1 there is an external fault Logic can be configured via External fault config LEt if a logic input has been assigned Active high HIG External fault config Parameter can be accessed if the external fault has been assigned to a logic input It defines the positive or negative logic of the input assigned to the fault O Active low LO Fault on falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the assigned input Active high HIG Fault on rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned input External fault mgt Freewheel YE
121. run command resulting in a slight delay of the current 0 5 s max Catch on the fly FLr is forced to No nO if brake logic control Brake assignment DLC is assigned page 181 or if Motor control type Ctt page 72 FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY or if in open loop control Auto DC injection AdC page 164 Continuous Ct Note This function should not be used with motors in parallel because the speed estimation based on motor current measurement is not possible Sensitivity 0 1 to 1590 0 6 The parameter be accessed at and above 55 kW 75 HP for the ATV71eeeM3X and at and above 90 kW 120 HP for the ATV71eeeNA Adjusts the catch on the fly sensitivity around the zero speed Decrease the value if the drive is not able to perform the catch on the fly and increase it if the drive locks on a fault as it performs the catch on the fly Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 246 AAV49426 04 2014 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Motor thermal protection Function Thermal protection by calculating the lat Note The memory of the motor thermal state is saved when the drive is switched off The power off time is used to recalculate the thermal state the next time the drive is switched on Naturally cooled motors The tripping curves depend on the motor frequency Force cooled motors Only the 50 Hz tripping curve needs to be considered regardless o
122. single Use a 3 phase line supply phase line supply Unbalanced load Disable the fault by Input phase loss IPL No nO This protection only operates with the page 249 drive on load Undervoltage Line supply too low Check the voltage and the parameters of UNDERVOLTAGE Transient voltage dip MGT USb page 253 This protection only operates with the drive running in motor mode Option card changed or removed When an option card is removed or replaced by another the drive locks in Incorrect config CFF fault mode on power up If the card has been deliberately changed or removed the fault can be cleared by pressing the ENT key twice which causes the factory settings to be restored see page 276 for the parameter groups affected by the card These are as follows Card replaced by a card of the same type O cards Drive configuration drM Encoder cards Drive configuration drM Communication cards only the parameters that are specific to communication cards Controller Inside cards Prog card menu PLC Card removed or replaced by a different type of card I O card Drive configuration drM Encoder card Drive configuration drM Communication card Drive configuration drM and parameters specific to communication cards Controller Inside card Drive configuration drM and Prog card menu PLC Control card changed When a control card is replaced by a control
123. speed measurement function L1 No nO Function inactive In this case none of the function parameters can be accessed Yes YES Function active assignment only possible if no other functions have been assigned to the Pulse input input Pulse scal divisor TINO DO 10 Scaling factor for the Pulse input input divisor The frequency measured is displayed by means of the Pulse in work freq FqS parameter page 52 or 54 Overspd pulse No nO Activation and adjustment of overspeed monitoring Overspeed SOF fault L1 No nO No overspeed monitoring O 1 Hz to 30 00 Hz Adjustment of the frequency tripping threshold on the Pulse input input divided by Pulse scal divisor FqC 0 0 s to 10 0 s 0 05 Pulse overspd delay Time delay for taking overspeed fault into account No nO Level fr pulse ctrl Activation and adjustment of monitoring for the input Pulse input speed feedback Speed fdback loss SPF fault L1 No nO No monitoring of speed feedback 0 1 Hz to 500 0 Hz Adjustment of the motor frequency threshold for tripping a speed feedback fault difference between the estimated frequency and the measured speed Pulse thd wo Run No nO Activation and adjustment of brake failure monitoring Brake feedback brF If brake logic control Brake assignment bLC page 181 is not configured this parameter i
124. speed time out Jog frequency Not cont FnC Non continuous mode Continuous FCt Continuous mode This option is not possible if Angle setting type ASt page 89 or 92 is With load brC or if Auto DC injection AdC page 164 is Yes YES or if Type of stop Stt page 162 is Freewheel nSt No FnO Function inactive This option is not possible if Motor control type Ctt page 72 SVC I or FVC FUC If Motor control type Ctt page 72 SVC I FUC Sync mot SYn the factory setting is replaced by Not cont FnC If Motor control type Ctt page 72 SVC V the factory setting is replaced by Not cont FnC at and above 55 kW 75 HP for ATV71eeeeM3X and at and above 90 kW 120 HP for ATV71eeeeN4 If Motor control type Ctt page 72 Sync CL FSY Motor fluxing FLU is forced to No FnO In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor n Continuous FCt mode the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up n Not cont FnC mode fluxing occurs when the motor starts up The flux current is greater than nCr configured rated motor current when the flux is established and is then adjusted to the motor magnetizing current CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instructio
125. supply or the run commands disappear saved to EEPROM Therefore the next time the drive starts up the speed reference is the last reference saved L1 No nO No save the next time the drive starts up the speed reference is Low speed LSP see page 45 RAM Saved in RAM EEprom EEP Saved in EEPROM Speed reference Allow to choose type of speed reference O No nO The reference is given by the measured motor speed Yes YES The reference is given by AAV49426 04 2014 171 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn speed around a reference The reference is given by Fr1 or Fr1b with summing subtraction multiplication functions and preset speeds if relevant see the diagram on page 139 For improved clarity we will call this reference A The action of the speed and speed buttons can be set as a of this reference A On stopping the reference A speed is not saved so the drive restarts with reference only The maximum total reference is always limited by High speed HSP and the minimum reference by Low speed LSP see page 57 Example of 2 wire control Acceleration 2 AC2 Motor frequency SrP Deceleration 2 dE2 Reference A SrP f 4 b 4 LSP LSP T Reference A L SrP 7 1 I 1 1 1 1 Forward Reverse 172 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPL
126. than 2 kHz Current Limitation and I Limit 2 value CL2 page 63 are limited to 1 36 In Adjustment with drive running If the initial value is less than 2 kHz it is not possible to increase it above 1 9 kHz while running If the initial value is greater than or equal to 2 kHz a minimum of 2 kHz must be maintained while running Adjustment with the drive stopped No restrictions Note In event of excessive temperature rise the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and reset it once the temperature returns to normal Note If Motor control type Ctt page 72 FVC Sync CL FSY we not recommend setting the switching frequency to a value less than 2 kHz in order to avoid speed instability CAUTION On ATV71e075N4 to U40N4 drives if the RFI filters are disconnected operation on an IT system the drive s switching frequency must not exceed 4 kHz Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Current Limitation 0 to 1 65 In 1 1 5 In 1 Used to limit the motor current The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 63 is less than 2 kHz Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss OPF fault mode if this has been enabled see page 249 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect CAUTION Check t
127. the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming AAV49426 04 2014 61 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Auto DC inj level 1 DU Level of standstill DC injection current This parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC page 164 is not No nO This parameter is forced to 0 if Motor control type Ctt page 72 7 Sync mot SYn or Sync CL FSY CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Auto DC inj time 1 0 1 to 30s 0 5s Standstill injection time This parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC page 164 is not No nO If Motor control type Ctt page 72 FVC FUC Sync mot SYn Sync CL FSY this time corresponds to the zero speed maintenance time Auto DC inj level 2 0 to 1 2 In 1 0 5 In 1 219 level of standstill DC injection current This parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC page 164 is not No nO This parameter is forced to 0 if Motor control type Ctt page 72 7 Sync mot SYn or Sync CL FSY CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can
128. the value of Rated motor freq FrS It must not exceed 500 Hz if the drive rating is higher than ATV71HD37 values between 500 Hz and 599 Hz are only possible for powers limited to 37 kW 50 HP 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate AAV49426 04 2014 43 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Name Description Factory setting E Un Auto tuning A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR ARC FLASH During auto tuning the motor operates at rated current Do not service the motor during auto tuning Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL t is essential that the following parameters Rated motor volt UnS Rated motor freq FrS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor speed nSP and Rated motor power nPr are correctly configured before starting auto tuning for asynchronous motor It is essential that the following parameters Nominal sync nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS and Syn EMF constant PHS are correctly configured before starting auto tuning for synchronous motor Autotune L d axis LdS and Autotune L q axis LqS shall be configured if Tune type tUnt is not set to ALL ALL see page 86 When one or more of these parameters have been changed after auto tuning has been performed Auto tuning tUn will r
129. threshold reached load variation detection Analog output AO1 can now be used as a logic output and assigned to relay functions and logic outputs page 129 New method of modifying the scale of analog outputs page 131 using the parameters Scaling AOx min ASLx and Scaling AOx max ASHx New methods of assigning logic outputs page 132 signed motor torque and measured motor speed New methods of assigning alarm groups page 136 rope slack high torque threshold low torque threshold measured speed threshold reached load variation detection 6 AAV49426 04 2014 Software enhancements Menu 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun The summing subtraction and multiplication reference functions can now be assigned to virtual input Network Al AIU1 page 157 New parameter Freewheel stop Thd FFt page 162 used to set a threshold for switching to freewheel at the end of a stop on ramp or fast stop Brake engage at regulated zero speed Brake engage at 0 bECd page 182 Weight Weight sensor ass PES page 190 can now be assigned to virtual input Network Al AlU1 New rope slack function page 194 with the parameters Rope slack config rSd and Rope slack trq level rStL Use of the ramp Acceleration 2 AC2 page 202 when starting and waking up the PID function The torque limitation TORQUE LIMITATION tOL page 209 can now be configured in whole 96 or in 0 196 increments using Torque incremen
130. to no no auto adaptation of the ramp Set the PID ramp PrP to the minimum permitted by the mechanism without triggering an ObF fault Set the integral gain to minimum Leave the derivative gain rdG at O Observe the PID feedback and the reference Switch the drive ON OFF a number of times or vary the load or reference rapidly a number of times Set the proportional gain rPG in order to ascertain the best compromise between response time and stability in transient phases slight overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before stabilizing If the reference varies from the preset value in steady state gradually increase the integral gain rlG reduce the proportional gain rPG in the event of instability pump applications find a compromise between response time and static precision see diagram Lastly the derivative gain may permit the overshoot to be reduced and the response time to be improved although this will make it more difficult to obtain a compromise in terms of stability as it depends on 3 gains Perform in production tests over the whole reference range 198 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Stabilization time Regulated value Reference Proportional gain rPG high Overshoot Static error Y rPG low Rise time 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 Integral gain Reference a5 time high low
131. when the shaft is rotated Prior to performing any type of work on the drive system block the motor shaft to prevent rotation AC voltage can couple voltage to unused conductors in the motor cable Insulate both ends of unused conductors of the motor cable Do not short across the DC bus terminals or the DC bus capacitors or the braking resistor terminals Before performing work on the drive system Disconnect all power including external control power that may be present Place a Do Not Turn On label on all power switches Lock all power switches in the open position Wait 15 minutes to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge The DC bus LED is not an indicator of the absence of DC bus voltage that can exceed 800 Measure the voltage on the DC bus between the DC bus terminals using a properly rated voltmeter to verify that the voltage is 42 Vdc If the DC bus capacitors do not discharge properly contact your local Schneider Electric representative Install and close all covers before applying voltage Failture to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury A CAUTION DAMAGED EQUIPMENT Do not operate or install any drive that appears damaged Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and for critical control functions
132. years depending on the operating conditions Remove any dust from the drive Assistance with maintenance fault display If a problem arises during setup or operation first check that the recommendations relating to the environment mounting and connections have been observed The first fault detected is saved and displayed and the drive locks The drive switching to fault mode can be indicated remotely via a logic output or a relay which can be configured in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS I O menu see for example RT CONFIGURATION r1 page 124 Menu 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal It displays faults and their cause in plain text and can be used to carry out tests see page 270 Clearing the fault Disconnect the drive power supply in the event of a non resettable fault Wait for the display to disappear completely Find the cause of the fault in order to correct it The drive is unlocked after a fault By switching off the drive until the display disappears completely then switching on again Automatically in the scenarios described for the AUTOMATIC RESTART Atr function page 245 By means of a logic input or control bit assigned to the FAULT RESET rSt function page 244 By pressing the STOP RESET button on the graphic display terminal Menu 1 2 MONITORING SUP This is used to prevent and find the causes of faults by displaying the drive state
133. 0 Brake Release time 1 Brake release time delay Auto AUtO Brake release freq 1 Brake release frequency threshold initialization of acceleration ramp The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 is not FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY and if Movement type bSt page 181 is Hoisting UEr O Auto AUtO The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor calculated using the drive parameters 0 to 10 Hz Manual control Brake engage freq 1 Auto AUtO Brake engage frequency threshold The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 is not FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY O Auto AUtO The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor calculated using the drive parameters 0 to 10 Hz Manual control Note Brake engage freq bEn is not compatible if Motor control type Ctt is set to FVC FUC and at and above 90 kW 125 HP for ATV71eeeeN4 and ATV71eeeeY Brake engage at 0 No nO Brake engages at regulated zero speed The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY Can be used to engage the brake at zero speed in closed loop mode with speed regulation This parameter can be used to adjust the brake engage delay once zero speed has been reached If a speed other than zero is then required the command to release the brake
134. 0 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD Content of MAIN MENU menus 1 DRIVE MENU See next page 2 ACCESS LEVEL Defines which menus can be accessed level of complexity 3 OPEN SAVE AS Can be used to save and recover drive configuration files 4 PASSWORD Provides password protection for the configuration 5 LANGUAGE Language selection 6 MONITORING CONFIG Customization of information displayed on the graphic display terminal during operation 7 DISPLAY CONFIG Customization of parameters Creation of a customized user menu Customization of the visibility and protection mechanisms for menus and parameters AAV49426 04 2014 27 Graphic display terminal 1 DRIVE MENU RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Code lt lt gt gt Quick 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD Content of 1 DRIVE MENU menus 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROLJ 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER
135. 0 V the minimum Switching freq SFr value is 2 5 kHz otherwise the minimum Switching freq SFr value is 4 0 kHz If the value is less than 2 kHz Current Limitation and I Limit 2 value CL2 page 63 are limited to 1 36 In Adjustment with drive running If the initial value is less than 2 kHz it is not possible to increase it above 1 9 kHz while running If the initial value is greater than or equal to 2 kHz a minimum of 2 kHz must be maintained while running Adjustment with the drive stopped No restrictions Note In the event of excessive temperature rise the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and reset it once the temperature returns to normal Note If Motor control type Ctt page 72 FVC Sync CL FSY we do not recommend setting the switching frequency to a value less than 2 kHz as this can cause speed instability CAUTION On ATV71e075NA4 to U40N4 drives if the RFI filters are disconnected operation on an IT system the drive s switching frequency must not exceed 4 kHz Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1 Parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 74 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Factory setting Current Limitation Used to limit the motor current The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if
136. 0096 The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch one sensor has been assigned Scaling factor applied to the stop distance to compensate for example a non linear ramp 220 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Parameter set switching PARAM SET SWITCHING A set of 1 to 15 parameters from the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu on page 55 can be selected and 2 or 3 different values assigned These 2 or 3 sets of values can then be switched using 1 or 2 logic inputs or control word bits This switching can be performed during operation motor running It can also be controlled on the basis of one or two frequency thresholds whereby each threshold acts as a logic input 0 lt threshold not reached 1 threshold reached Values 1 Values 2 Values 3 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3
137. 00Hz 0A 1 6 COMMAND MAIN MENU ENT 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT TEL ETT PTC MANAGEMENT 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 9 COMMUNICATION 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD With integrated display terminal Summary of functions mE MEM MANAGEMENT 243 xxx Displays the state of the drive ETE FAULT RESET 244 Akr AUTOMATIC RESTART 245 Pa CATCH ON THE FLY 246 Ee MOTOR THERMAL PROT 248 OPL OUTPUT PHASE LOSS 249 Dp INPUT PHASE LOSS 249 DHL DRIVE OVERHEAT 250 SAE THERMAL ALARM STOP 251 EEF EXTERNAL FAULT 252 WS UNDERVOLTAGE MGT 253 E IE IGBT TESTS 254 LFL 4 20mA LOSS 255 InH FAULT INHIBITION 256 Ett COM FAULT MANAGEMENT 287 Erg ENCODER FAULT 258 E TORQUE OR I LIM DETECT 258 FREQUENCY METER 260 SI dLd DYNAMIC LOAD DETECT 262 DB RES PROTECTION 263 BUF BU PROTECTION 263 Eat AUTO TUNING FAULT 263 PP CARDS PAIRING 264 LFF FALLBACK SPEED 265 RAMP DIVIDER 265 dC l DC INJECTION 265 AAV49426 04 2014 241 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt The parameters in the 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and there is no run command except f
138. 01 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In profile can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In profile can be switched without logic inputs E d oe Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 Speed assignment No nO No nO Function inactive L11 LI1 to LI6 LI7 LI7 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 1114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In profile can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In profile can be switched without logic inputs El E Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 Reference saved Associated with the speed function this parameter can be used to save reference When the run commands disappear saved to RAM When the line
139. 1 08 yd 15 4 1 5 2 1 5 14 109 36 yd 76 55 yd 49 21 114 83 yd 92 96 yd 71 08 yd ATV71HU22N4A 22 3 1 5 14 120 30 yd 71 08yd 49 21 114 83 yd 92 96 yd 71 08 yd ATV71HU30N4 3 1 5 14 120 30 yd 71 08yd 49 21 114 83 yd 92 96 yd 71 08 yd ATV71HU40N4 4 5 1 5 14 120 30 yd 71 08 yd 49 21 yd 114 83 yd 92 96 yd 71 08 yd ATV71HU55N4 5 5 7 5 215 14 131 23 yd 71 08yd 49 21yd 114 83 yd 92 96 yd 71 08 yd ATV71HU75NA 7 5 10 25 14 131 23 yd 71 08 49 21 114 83 yd 92 96 yd 71 08 yd ATV71HD11N4 11 15 6 10 125 77 yd 65 62yd 49 21 yd 109 36 yd 82 02 yd 60 15 yd 71 15 4 15 20 10 8 114 83 yd 65 62yd 43 74yd 109 36 yd 76 55 yd 54 68 yd ATV7T1HD18N4 18 5 25 10 8 125 77 yd 65 62yd 38 28yd 164 04 yd 82 02 yd 54 68 yd ATV71HD22N4A 22 30 16 6 164 04 yd 65 62yd 43 74yd 164 04 yd 76 55 yd 54 68 yd ATV71HD30N4 30 40 25 4 164 04 60 15 yd 38 28yd 164 04 yd 76 55 yd 54 68 yd ATV71HD37N4 37 50 35 5 218 72yd 71 08yd 54 68 9 164 04 76 55yd 54 68 yd ATV71HD45N4 45 60 50 0 218 72yd 60 15yd 32 81 164 04 yd 65 62 yd 43 74 yd ATV71HD55N4 55 75 70 2 0 218 72yd 54 68yd 27 34yd 164 04 yd 60 15 yd 32 81 yd ATV71HD75N4A 75 100 95 4 0 218 72yd 49 21yd 27 34 1164 04 yd 60 15 yd 32 81 yd Altivar 71 Motor Cable cross section Maximum cable length in meters Reference Power Shielded BELDEN cable Shielded PROTOFLEX cable Type 2950x Type EMV 2YSLCY J kW HP in mm AWG SOP 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 SOP 10 SOP 8 SOP 6 ATV71HO75N4 0 75 1 15 14 5
140. 2 or 3 can be accessed if parameter switching has been enabled see page 222 List of current alarms If an alarm is present a appears List of secondary states In motor fluxing FLX In motor fluxing PTC1 alarm PtC1 Probe alarm 1 PTC2 alarm PtC2 Probe alarm 2 LIG PTC alarm PtC3 116 PTC probe alarm Fast stop in prog FSt Fast stop in progress Current Th attained CtA Current threshold attained Current threshold Ctd page 69 Freq Th attained FtA Frequency threshold attained Freq threshold Ftd page 70 Freq Th 2 attained F2A 279 frequency threshold attained Freq threshold 2 F2d page 70 Frequency ref att SrA Frequency reference attained Motor th state att 15 Motor 1 thermal state attained External fault alarm EtF External fault alarm Auto restart AUtO Automatic restart in progress Remote FtL Line mode control Auto tuning tUn Performing auto tuning Undervoltage USA Undervoltage alarm Cnfg 1 act CnF 1 Configuration 1 active Cnfg 2 act CnF2 Configuration 2 active HSP attained FLA High speed attained Load slipping AnA Slipping alarm Set 1 active CFP1 Parameter set 1 active Set 2 active CFP2 Parameter set 2 active Set 3 active CFP3 Parameter set 3 active In braking brS Drive braking DC bus loading dbL DC bus loading Forward MFrd Motor running forward Reverse MrrS Mot
141. 3 Cd13 In profile IO can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In profile IO can be switched without logic inputs Faults are reset when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 if the cause of the fault has disappeared The STOP RESET button on the graphic display terminal performs the same function See pages 294 to 298 for a list of faults that can be reset manually Product reset assig No nO Parameter can only be modified in ACCESS LEVEL Expert mode Drive reinitialization via logic input Can be used to reset all faults without having to disconnect the drive from the power supply The drive is reinitialized on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned input The drive can only be reinitialized when locked No nO Function inactive L11 LI1 to LI6 07 LI7 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted To assign reinitialization press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s CAUTION Make sure that the cause of the fault that led to the drive locking has been removed before reinitializing Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Product reset No nO Parameter can only be accessed in ACCESS LEVEL Expert mode Drive reinitialization Can be used to reset all faults w
142. 4 2014 9 Software enhancements Enhancements made to version V5 9 5383 in comparison to V3 4 5383 Motor frequency range The maximum output frequency has been limited to 599 Hz 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu New parameter and function New parameter Motor torque tqS page 84 New parameter Measured Ld axis LdmS page 87 New parameter Measured Lqd axis LqmS page 87 New parameter Tune Type tUnt page 45 page 86 and page 94 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu New parameter and function New assigning logic output R1 Assignment r1 page 124 Drive start Strt 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn menu New parameter and function New parameter Brake logic filter T FbCI page 181 New parameter BRH b4 freq bFtd page 186 New parameter Pmax Motor tPMM page 210 New parameter Pmax Generator tPMG page 210 New factory setting IGBT test Strt page 254 has been modified No nO to Yes YES Dis operat opt code dOtd page 61 has been modified Freewheel nSt to Ramp stop rMP Enhancements made to version V6 2 in comparison to V5 9 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn menu New parameter and function New parameter Speed reference Srt page 171 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt menu New monitoring parameter Freq catch on fly FCAO available with PC Software see Catch on the fly FLr page 246 Enhancements made to version V6 7 in comparison to V6 2
143. 4 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HU15N4 1 5 2 15 14 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HU22N4A 2 2 3 1 5 14 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HU30N4 3 125 14 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HU40N4 4 5 1 5 14 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HU55N4 5 5 7 5 2 5 14 54 68 yd 43 74 9 32 81 yd ATV71HU75N4 75 10 2 5 14 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HD11N4 11 15 6 10 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HD15N4 15 20 10 8 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HD18N4 18 5 25 10 8 54 68 yd 43 74yd 32 81 yd ATV71HD22N4 22 30 16 6 82 02yd 43 74yd 27 34 ATV71HD30N4 30 40 25 4 82 02yd 43 74yd 27 34 ATV71HD37N4 37 50 35 5 82 02yd 43 74yd 27 34 ATV71HD45N4 45 60 50 0 82 02 yd 43 74yd 27 34 ATV71HD55N4 55 75 70 2 0 82 02yd 32 81yd 16 40 yd ATV71HD75N4A 75 100 95 4 0 82 02yd 32 81yd 16 40 yd For 230 400 V motors used at 230 V the Motor surge limit SUL parameter can remain lt No nO AAV49426 04 2014 103 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting According to drive voltage rating Braking level DC bus voltage threshold above which the braking transistor cuts in to limit this voltage ATV71eeeeM3e factory setting 395 V ATV71eeeeNA factory setting 785 V ATV71eeeeS6X factory setting 980 V The adjustment range depends on the voltage rating of the drive and the Mains voltage UrES parameter page 253 Braking balance no L1 No nO Function inactive O Yes YES Funct
144. 4 V Configuration 1 2 9 Configuration 2 i LI Configuration 2 c Auto tuning in multimotor mode This auto tuning can be performed Manually using a logic input when the motor changes e Automatically each time the motor is activated for the 1 time after switching on the drive if the Automatic autotune parameter on page 93 lt Yes YES Motor thermal states in multimotor mode The drive protects the three motors individually Each thermal state takes into account all stop times including drive shutdowns It is therefore not necessary to perform auto tuning every time the power is switched on It is sufficient to auto tune each motor at least once Configuration information output In the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS I O menu a logic output can be assigned to each configuration or motor 2 3 for remote information transmission Note As the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu is switched these outputs must be assigned in all configurations in which information is required AAV49426 04 2014 225 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Multimotors L1 No nO Multiconfiguration possible O Yes YES Multimotor possible Note At each multi motor configuration switching the drive performs an automatic measurement of the phase shift angle at next run order No n
145. 9 Graphic display terminal Description of the graphic screen Term 0 00 Hz 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START Ua e 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 Display line Its content can be configured the factory settings show The drive state see page 21 The active control channel Term Terminals HMI Graphic display terminal MDB Integrated Modbus CAN Integrated CANopen NET Communication card APP Controller Inside card Frequency reference Current in the motor 2 Menu line Indicates the name of the current menu or submenu 3 Menus submenus parameters values bar charts etc are displayed in drop down window format on a maximum of 5 lines The line or value selected by the navigation button is displayed in reverse video 4 Section displaying the functions assigned to the F1 to F4 keys and aligned with them for example Code F1 Displays the code of the selected parameter i e the code corresponding to the 7 segment display HELP F1 Contextual help lt lt F2 Navigate horizontally to the left or go to previous menu submenu or for a value to next digit up displayed in reverse video see the example on page 22 2 63 Navigate horizontally to the right or go to next menu submenu going to the 2 ACCESS LEVEL menu in this example or for a value go to the next digit down displayed in reverse video see the example on
146. 9426 04 2014 207 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Torque limitation There are two types of torque limitation With a value that is fixed by a parameter With a value that is set by an analog input Al pulse or encoder If both types are enabled the lowest value is taken into account The two types of limitation can be configured or switched remotely using a logic input or via the communication bus Motoring torque lim Gen torque lim tLIG RP Pl Encoder PG Torque limit activ tLA Yes YES Torque Q limitation via LI parameter SA O 7 d LI nO Analog limit Yes Torque YES limitation via Ge Al analog input T E RP or ps O Encoder O No nO LI Torque ref assign Limitation value taken into account 208 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Torque limit activ No nO Function inactive O Yes YES Function always active O L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the function is inactive If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active Torque increment 1 1 The parameter cannot be accessed if Torque limit activ No nO
147. 96 or 100 gt 100 in order to obtain a bidirectional output from a unidirectional input Reference Reference 4 100 cemere 100 5 1 1 1 Current Current or 1 voltage Min value voltage 096 s input 0 input Min value Max value 20 mA Max value 20 Range 0 10096 or 10V or 10 V 10096 Range 10096 10096 110 AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Reference template Standard bSd O Standard bSd Frequency At zero reference the frequency LSP 4 HSP LSP 100 j Reference O Pedestal DLS Frequency At reference 0 to LSP the frequency LSP HSP t Reference 100 Deadband bnS Frequency At reference lt 0 to LSP the frequency lt 0 HSP Reference 100 Deadband 0 bnS0 Frequency This operation is the same as Standard bSd except that in the following cases at zero reference the frequency lt 0 The signal is less than Min value which is greater than 0 example 1 V on a 2 10 V input The signal is greater than Min value which is greater than Max value example 11 V on a 00 Reference 10 0 V input If the input range is configured as bidirectional operation remains identical to Standard bSd This parameter defines how the speed reference is taken into accoun
148. AAV49426 Altivar 71 Variable speed drives for synchronous and asynchronous motors Programming manual Specification 383 Software V6 7 04 2014 Schneider www schneider electric com Electric Contents Before you begin Documentation structure Software enhancements Steps for setting up 11 Factory configuration 12 Application functions 13 Setup Preliminary recommendations 17 Graphic display terminal 19 Description of terminal 19 Description of the graphic screen 20 First power up 5 LANGUAGE menu 29 Subsequent power ups 24 Programming Example of accessing a parameter Quick navigation 25 26 Integrated display terminal 29 Functions of the display and the keys 29 Accessing menus 30 Accessing menu parameters 31 2 ACCESS LEVEL LAC 32 Structure of parameter tables 35 Interdependence of parameter values 36 Finding a parameter in this document 37 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM 38 1 2 MONITORING SUP 46 1 3 SETTINGS SEt 55 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC 1 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS I O 1 6 COMMAND CtL 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 F
149. ACTORY SETTINGS FCS 1 13 USER MENU USr 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD PLC 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD COd 16 MONITORING CONFIG 7 DISPLAY CONFIG MULTIPOINT SCREEN Maintenance Faults Causes Remedies User settings tables Index of functions Index of parameter codes 107 197 150 240 241 266 270 213 274 277 278 279 281 283 287 292 293 294 300 302 304 AAV49426 04 2014 Before you begin Read and understand these instructions before performing any procedure on this drive DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH Only appropriately trained persons who are familiar with and understand the contents of this manual and all other pertinent product documentation and who have received safety training to recognize and avoid hazards involved are authorized to work on and with this drive system Installation adjustment repair and maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel The system integrator is responsible for compliance with all local and national electrical code requirements as well as all other applicable regulations with respect to grounding of all equipment Many components of the product including the printed circuit boards operate with mains voltage Do not touch Use only electrically insulated tools Donottouch unshielded components or terminals with voltage present Motors can generate voltage
150. ATV71eeeNA4 200 to 480 V ATV71eeeS6X 400 to 600 Rated mot current 0 25 to 1 5 In 1 Rated motor current given on the nameplate 10 to 599 Hz Rated motor freq Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate The factory setting is 50 Hz or preset to 60 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr is set to 60 Hz The maximum value is limited to 500 Hz if Motor control type Ctt page 72 is not V F or if the drive rating is higher than ATV71HD37 Values between 500 Hz and 599 Hz are only possible in V F control and for powers limited to 37 KW 50 HP In this case configure Motor control type Ctt before Rated motor freq FrS rpm increment Increment of parameter Rated motor speed nSP x1 rpm 1 Increment of 1 rpm to be used if Rated motor speed nSP does not exceed 65535 rpm O x10 rpm 10 Increment of 10 rpm to be used if Rated motor speed nSP exceeds 65535 rpm Note Changing rpm increment InSP will restore Rated motor speed nSP to its factory setting Rated motor speed Rated motor speed given on the nameplate Adjustable between 0 and 65535 rpm if rpm increment INSP x1 rpm 1 or between 0 00 and 96 00 krpm if rpm increment InSP x10 rpm 10 0 to 9999 rpm then 10 00 to 65 53 or 96 00 krpm on the integrated display terminal If rather than the rated speed the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the sl
151. AV49426 04 2014 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Use of the Pulse input input to measure the speed of rotation of the motor This function uses the Pulse input input from the VW3A3202 extension card and can therefore only be used if this card has been inserted and if the Pulse input input is not being used for another function Example of use An indexed disk driven by the motor and connected to a proximity sensor can be used to generate a frequency signal that is proportional to the speed of rotation of the motor Time in seconds rs When applied to the Pulse input input this signal supports Measurement and display of the motor speed signal frequency lt 1 T This frequency is displayed by means of the Pulse in work freq FqS parameter page 52 or 54 Overspeed detection if the measured speed exceeds a preset threshold the drive will trip on a fault Brake failure detection if brake logic control has been configured If the speed does not drop sufficiently quickly following a command to engage the brake the drive will trip on a fault This function can be used to detect worn brake linings Detection of a speed threshold that can be adjusted using Pulse warning thd FqL page 70 and is assignable to a relay or logic output see page 124 AAV49426 04 2014 259 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Frequency meter Activation of the
152. AVE AS 4 PASSWORD Unlocked 5 LANGUAGE Code With integrated display terminal Power up Displays the state of the drive m Enables the configuration to be protected with an access code or a password to be entered in order to access a protected configuration Example with graphic display terminal RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 PIN code 1 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80A 4 PASSWORD Status Unlocked PIN code 1 PIN code 2 Unlocked 9520 Upload rights Permitted Download rights Unlock drv Min 7 Unlocked Max 9999 lt lt gt gt The drive is unlocked when the PIN codes are to unlocked OFF password when correct code has been entered All menus are visible Before protecting the configuration with an access code you must Define the Upload rights ULr and Download rights dLr Make a careful note of the code and keep it in a safe place where you will always be able to find it The drive has 2 access codes enabling 2 access levels to be set up PIN code 1 is a public unlock code 6969 PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support It can only be accessed in Expert mode Only one PIN1 or PIN2 code can be used the other must remain set to OFF OFF Note When the unlock code is entered the user access code appears The following
153. C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 to CD13 Cd15 In VO profile IO can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 14 to CD15 Cd15 In VO profile IO can be switched without logic inputs If Profile CHCF 8 serie SE8 then only Yes YES and are available A CAUTION DAMAGED EQUIPMENT It is absolutely necessary to carry out further parameter setting on all ATV71 drive connnected to Active Front End AFE Check the list of parameter on next page Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage AAV49426 04 2014 239 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Active Front End connection It is necessary to carry out the following settings for all frequency inverters connected to an active front end Mains voltage Parameter Mains voltage UrES Same setting as the active front end Thereby the internal voltage levels of the frequency inverter are adapted Parameter Input phase loss IPL has to be set to Ignore nO Parameter for operation with active front end Regen Connection Olr has to be set to Yes YES Thereby the undervoltage level of the frequency inverter is adapted to the operation with the
154. CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage DC injection time 2 1 3 995 Maximum injection time DC inject level 2 IdC2 for injection selected as stop mode only Can be accessed if Type of stop Stt DC injection 4 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt and 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn menus 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate 3 Warning These settings are independent of the AUTO DC INJECTION AdC function Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 265 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM With graphic display terminal Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT ENT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 9 COMMUNICATION E 9 COM SCANNER INPUT 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD With integrated display terminal Power up 266 AAV49426 04 2014 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting S
155. D function is active in automatic mode Note Ref 1B channel Fr1b and Ref 1B switching rCb must be configured in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu 140 AAV49426 04 2014 1 6 COMMAND CtL Command channel for Not separ SIM configuration Reference and command not separate The command channel is determined by the reference channel Parameters Fr1 Fr2 rFC FLO and FLOC are common to reference and command Example If the reference is Fr1 11 analog input at the terminals control is via LI logic input at the terminals Ref 1 channel Ref 2 switching Fre Ref 2 channel Key Parameter The black square represents the factory setting assignment L Al4 RUN STOP FWD REV Graphic display terminal Profile LI Graphic display terminal ail YES Stop Key priority CMD Forward Reverse STOP AAV49426 04 2014 141 1 6 COMMAND CtL Command channel for Separate SEP configuration Separate reference and command Parameters FLO and FLOC are common to reference and command Example If the reference is in forced local mode analog input at the terminals command in forced local mode is via LI logic input at the terminals The command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of
156. DRIVE MENU 1 6 COMMAND 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD With integrated display terminal Power up Displays the state of the drive ENT E 1 AAV49426 04 2014 137 1 6 COMMAND CtL The parameters in the 1 6 COMMAND CtL menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present Command and reference channels Run commands forward reverse stop etc and references can be sent using the following channels Control Reference Terminals logic inputs Terminals analog inputs Al frequency input encoder Graphic display terminal Graphic display terminal Integrated Modbus Integrated Modbus Integrated CANopen Integrated CANopen Communication card Communication card Controller Inside card Controller Inside card speed via the terminals speed via the graphic display terminal The behavior of the Altivar 71 can be adapted according to requirements 8 serie SE8 To replace an Altivar 58 See the Migration Manual Not separ SIM Command and reference are sent via the same channel Separate SEP Command and reference may be sent via different channels In these con
157. Deceleration 2 24 AAV49426 04 2014 Graphic display terminal Programming Example of accessing a parameter Accessing the acceleration ramp RDY Term 0 00 2 0A RDY Term 0 00 2 0 RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 3 SETTINGS Acceleration 1 1 SIMPLY START Ramp increment 01 1 2 MONITORING Acceleration 9 515 1 3 SETTINGS Deceleration 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL Acceleration 2 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Deceleration 2 Code lt lt gt gt lt lt Note To select a parameter Turn the navigation button to scroll vertically To modify a parameter Use the lt lt and gt gt keys F2 and to scroll horizontally and select the digit to be modified the selected digit changes to white on a black background Turn the navigation button to modify the digit To cancel the modification Press ESC To save the modification Press the navigation button ENT AAV49426 04 2014 25 Graphic display terminal Quick navigation If the Quick function is displayed above the F4 key you can gain quick access to a parameter from any screen Example RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL Standard mot freq 5 0Hz IEC Rated motor power 0 37 kW 0 5 HP Rated motor volt 206V Rated mot current 1 0A Rated motor freq 50 0 Hz Press F4 to access the Quick screen which contains 4 selection options HOME Return to MAIN MENU T
158. During the brake engage sequence the current changes to 0 according to the ramp Current ramp time brr at the end of the Brake engage time bEt BRH b2 brH2 lt 1 When the brake is released the reference is enabled when the logic input changes to 1 When the brake is engaged the current changes to 0 according to the ramp Current ramp time brr when the logic input changes to 0 Relay 4 logic output Run command bEt Torque gt 1 1 Frequency 4 Current 2 UH BRH 52 brH2 0 gt Brake contact 1 Logic input _ Torque SS ____ eee Frequency 4 blr 4 Ibr BRH b2 brH2 lt 1 BRH b3 E In closed loop mode only Management of the absence of brake contact response if it is assigned 0 0 During the brake engage sequence the brake contact must be open before the end of Brake engage time bEt otherwise the drive locks in a brF brake contact fault 1 1 During the brake engage sequence the brake contact must be open before the end of Brake engage time bEt otherwise a bCA brake contact alarm is triggered and zero speed is maintained BRH b4 d In closed loop mode only Activation of the speed loop at zero if a movement for which no command has been given occurs measurement of a speed greater than a fixed min threshold 0 0 No action in the event of a movement for which no
159. EN SAVE AS DOWNLOAD GROUP None No parameters All All parameters in all menus Drive configuration The entire 1 DRIVE MENU without 1 9 COMMUNICATION and 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD Motor parameters Rated motor power nPr Rated motor volt UnS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor freq FrS Rated motor speed nSP Auto tuning tUn Auto tuning status tUS Angle auto test ASA Angle offset value ASU 00 UO to 05 05 F1 F1 F5 F5 V constant power UCP Freq Const Power FCP Nominal sync nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS Syn EMF constant PHS Autotune L d axis LdS Autotune L q axis LqS Cust stator R syn rSAS Motor torque tqS IR compensation UFr Slip compensation SLP The motor parameters that can be accessed in Expert mode page 82 and 87 In the 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu Mot therm current ItH In the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Communication All the parameters in the 1 9 COMMUNICATION menu Prog control inside card All the parameters in the 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD menu 280 AAV49426 04 2014 4 PASSWORD COd With graphic display terminal Term 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN S
160. ENT Switches to 2 ACCESS LEVEL menu see page 32 Standard Select the access level and press ENT Switches to 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START see page 28 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG ESC i Press ESC to return to MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE AAV49426 04 2014 Graphic display terminal Subsequent power ups 3 seconds later switches to DRIVE MENU or to 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD If no operator inputs are made switches to Display automatically 10 seconds later the display will vary depending on the selected configuration Users can return to MAIN MENU by pressing ENT or ESC Schneider dj Electric ATV71HU22N4383 2 2kW 3HP 380 480V Config n 1 or if the Controller Inside card is present 3 seconds RDY Term 38Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 10 seconds RDY Term 38Hz 0A Frequency ref 38 Hz ESC or ESC RDY Term 38Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS RDY Term 0 00Hz 0 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD A Modbus add Prg C 17 DATE TIME SETTINGS RDY 0007 Menu selected in 01 1 8 SETTINGS Power up menu Ramp increment page 291 ENT ENTERS 9 515 Deceleration Acceleration 2
161. ENT OPERATION If the equipment switches to forced local mode see page 269 the virtual input remains fixed at the last value transmitted Do not use the virtual input and forced local mode in the same configuration Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 209 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Analog limit act Yes YES The parameter can be accessed if Torque ref assign tAA is not No nO O Yes YES The limitation depends on the input assigned by Torque ref assign O L11 LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 145 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 The limitation is specified by the Motoring torque lim tLIM and Gen torque lim parameters if Torque limit activ is not No nO No limitation if Torque limit activ No nO If the assigned input or bit is at 1 The limitation depends on the input assigned by Torque ref assign tAA Note If Torque limitation and Torque ref assign are enabled at the same time the lowest value will be taken into account 0 g Pmax Motor 10 to 300 300 Maximum power in motor mode The parameter cannot be ac
162. Even if high speed operation has been activated if the motor frequency drops below the I Limit Frequency SCL threshold page 195 the drive will switch to fault mode On descend operation takes the form of speed reference mode AAV49426 04 2014 261 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Dynamic load time No nO Activation of load variation detection and adjustment of time delay for taking load variation fault Dynamic load fault dLF into account L1 No nO No load variation detection 0 00 s to 10 00 s Adjustment of the time delay for taking fault into account Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Dynamic load time 100 Adjustment of the trip threshold for load variation detection as a of the load measured during the speed step load Mgt Freewheel YES Behavior of the drive in the event of a load variation fault O Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 162 without tripping fault In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 108 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for
163. FG Name Description Adjustment range AO3 assignment No nO Same assignments as AO1 without dO 1 901 AO3 Type Current 0A Voltage 10U Voltage output Current Current output Voltage n10U Bipolar voltage output min Output The parameter can be accessed if AO3 Type AO3t Current 0A AO3 max Output 010200 NUS The parameter can be accessed if AO3 Type AO3t Current AO3 min Output d The parameter be accessed if Type AO3t Voltage 100 or Voltage n10U AO3 max Output 00 10 0 V 10 0 V The parameter can be accessed if AO3 Type AO3t Voltage 100 or Voltage n10U Scaling AO3 min ope Um Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maxiumum possible variation Scaling AO3 max 0 to 100 0 96 100 0 96 Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maxiumum possible variation AO3 Filter 0 to 10 00 s 0s Interference filtering AAV49426 04 2014 135 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O The following submenus group the alarms into 1 to 3 groups each of which can be assigned to a relay or a logic output for remote signaling These groups can also be displayed on the graphic display terminal see 6 MONITORING CONFIG menu and viewed the 1 2 MONITORING SUP
164. FREQ SIGNAL IMAGE ENT RP assignment RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 RP input 25 45 kHz Encoder 225 kHz Frequency ref RP min value RP max value RP filter Code lt lt gt gt Quick Quick AAV49426 04 2014 47 1 2 MONITORING SUP With graphic display terminal Controller Inside card I O Term 50 00Hz 80 PROG CARD I O MAP PROG CARD AI MAP PROG CARD LO MAP PROG CARD AO MAP State o RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 PROG CARD LI MAP LI51 LI52 1153 1154 1155 1156 LI57 1158 m State1 m Term 50 00Hz 80 PROG CARD AI MAP 0 000 mA Move from one screen to another from PROG CARD LI MAP to PROG CARD AO MAP by turning the navigation button PROG CARD LO MAP m LO51 LO52 LO53 LO54 LO55 LO56 Term 50 00Hz 80 PROG CARD AO MAP RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 ENT mA Min 0 001 Max lt 20 000 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80A ENT 0 mA Min 0 001 Max lt 20 000 48 AAV49426 04 2014 1 2 MONITORING SUP With graphic display terminal Communication RUN Term 50 00 2 COMMUNICATION Command Channel Modbus Cmd value ABCD Hex Active ref channel CANopen Frequency ref 12 5 Hz ETA state word 2153 Hex W3141 F230 Hex W2050 F230 Hex W4325 F230 Hex WO0894 F230 Hex COM SCANNER INPUT MAP COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP CMD WORD IMAGE FREQ REF WORD MAP MODBUS NETWOR
165. ICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting speed assignment No nO Function inactive E L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 Speed assignment No nO Function inactive L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1 Speed limitation 0 to 50 90 10 96 This parameter limits the variation range with speed as a of the reference The ramps used in this function are Acceleration 2 AC2 and Deceleration 2 dE2 The parameter can be accessed if speed is assigned Acceleration 2 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 5 05 Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS or Nominal freq sync FrSS page 87 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven The parameter can be accessed if speed is assigned Deceleration 2 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 5 0s Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq FrS or Nominal freq sync FrSS page 87 to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven The parameter can be accessed if speed is assigned 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9
166. In the new version this output is not assigned at all With the exception of these two parameters the factory settings of version V1 1 remain the same in the new version The new functions are factory set to disabled Motor frequency range The maximum output frequency has been extended from 1000 to 1600 Hz depending on the drive rating and control profile New parameters and functions Menu 1 2 MONITORING SUP Addition of internal states and values relating to the new functions described below Menu 1 3 SETTINGS SEt High torque thd ttH page 69 Low torque thd ttL page 69 Pulse warning thd FqL page 70 Freewheel stop Thd FFt page70 Menu 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC rpm increment InSP page 78 Extension of the following configurations to all drive ratings previously limited to 45 kW 60 HP for ATV71eeeM3X and to 75 kW 100 HP for ATV71eeeN4 synchronous motor Sync mot SYn page 72 sinus filter Sinus filter OFI page 74 noise reduction Noise reduction nrd page 101 braking balance Braking balance bbA page 104 Menu 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS Input can now be configured to 0 10 V or 0 10 V via 11 Type Al1t page 113 Al net channel AIC1 page 117 New methods of assigning relays and logic outputs page 124 rope slack high torque threshold low torque threshold motor in forward rotation motor in reverse rotation measured speed
167. JAPL parameter it can cause speed instability and loss of motor control which could lead to a sudden drop in hoisting and lift applications for example The inertia may vary significantly according to the application in general it is very high for lifts As such the default value does not guarantee correct operation e Itis essential to determine and enter the exact inertia value in high performance speed loop mode Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Fr Loop Stab 0 to 100 This parameter can be accessed if Speed loop type SSL High perfor HPF Stability Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient according to the dynamics of the machine Gradually increase the stability to increase control loop attenuation and thus reduce any overspeed FreqLoopGain 0 to 100 Frequency loop gain Used to adapt the response of the machine speed transients according to the dynamics For machines with hight resistive torque high inercia of fast cycles increase the gain gradually FreqLoopGain FLG is set to 20 when Motor control type Ctt is set to Sync mot SYn or Sync CL FSY 1 Parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Advice on setting the parameters in this menu can be found on pages 58 to 60 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 96 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL
168. K DIAG MODBUS HMI DIAG CANopen MAP PROG CARD SCANNER COMMUNICATION MAP indicates the types of bus used for control or reference the corresponding command and reference values the status word the words selected in the DISPLAY CONFIG menu etc The display format hexadecimal or decimal can be configured in the DISPLAY CONFIG menu RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 COM SCANNER INPUT MAP Com Scan In1 val Com Scan In2 val Com Scan In3 val Com Scan In4 val Com Scan In5 val Com Scan In6 val 0 Com Scan In7 val 0 Com Scan In8 val 0 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 CMD WORD IMAGE L p Modbus 0000 Hex CANopen cmd 0000 Hex COM card cmd 0000 Hex Prog card cmd 0000 Hex Com Scan Out1 val Com Scan Out2 val Com Scan Out3 val Com Scan Out4 val Com Scan 5 val Com Scan Out6 val 0 Com Scan Out val 0 Com Scan val 0 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 FREQ REF WORD MAP COM SCANNER INPUT MAP and COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP Visualization of registers exchanged periodically 8 input and 8 output for integrated Modbus and for fieldbus cards Ref Modbus 0 0 Hz Ref CANopen 0 0 Hz Com card ref 0 0 Hz p Prog Card ref 0 0 Hz AAV49426 04 2014 49 1 2 MONITORING SUP With graphic display terminal Communication continued The state of the LEDs the pe
169. LE CARD 6W0410XXXXXXXXXX product Vx x OPTION 1 EXTENSION CARD IE xx OPTION 2 FIPIO CARD IE xx GRAPHIC TERMINAL GRAPHIC S Vx x IE xx ENCODER RS 422 The 1 11 IDENTIFICATION menu can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal This is a read only menu that cannot be configured It enables the following information to be displayed Drive reference power rating and voltage Drive software version Drive serial number Type of options present with their software version AAV49426 04 2014 273 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS With graphic display terminal Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION RDY Term 0 00Hz OA 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS ENT 1 11 IDENTIFICATION ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS Macro Conf 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 13 USER MENU 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD With integrated display terminal Power up The 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu is used to Replace the current configuration with the factory configuration or a previously saved configuration All or part of the current configuration can be replaced select a group of parameters in order to select the menus you wish to load with the selected source configuration Save the current con
170. LEL or Fwd priority PFO If not a new run command must be sent Ramp divider 1 0 to 10 4 The parameter can be accessed if Type of stop Stt Fast stop FSt and if Fast stop assign FSt is not No nO or if tOst Stop on Top Z is not No nO The ramp that is enabled dEC or dE2 is then divided by this coefficient when stop requests are sent Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 162 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting DC injection assign Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 151 L1 No nO Not assigned L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 DC injection braking is initiated when the assigned input or bit changes to state 1 If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active the motor will only restart if 2 3 wire control page 108 2 wire 2C and 2 wire type Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO If not a new run command must be sent g DC inject level 1 1 3 0 1 to 1 41 In 2 0 64 In 2 Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode The parameter can be accessed if
171. LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected L1 R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted dO 1 dO 1 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO 1 assignment AO1 page 132 7 No nO The assigned output or relay changes to state 1 when the traverse control operating time reaches the Reel time tbO 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 232 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Counter wobble L1 No nO Function not assigned L11 LI1 See the assignment conditions on 145 Synchronization input To be configured on the winding drive slave only Sync wobble L1 No nO Function not assigned LO1 LO1 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected L1 R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted dO1 dO1 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO1 assignment AO1 page 132 7 No nO Synchronization output To be configured on the yarn guide drive master o
172. N RISK OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE The drive and motor are no longer protected in the event of thermal alarm stops This invalidates the warranty Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 162 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 108 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 151 Note A fault trip will occur when the thermal state reaches 118 of the rated state and reactivation will occur when the state
173. NGS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU Standard This is the factory set level Access to 6 menus only and access to all submenus in the 1 DRIVE MENU menu A single function can be assigned to each input RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 9 BBWAA 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 6 MONITORING CONFIG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT Advanced 1 9 COMMUNICATION Access to all menus and submenus 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS Several functions can be assigned to 1 11 IDENTIFICATION each input 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU Tem 70908 OA 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD MAIN MENU 1 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 6 MONITORING CONFIG 7 DISPLAY CONFIG Expert Access to all menus and submenus as for Advanced level and access to additional parameters Several functions can be assigned to each input RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 6 MONITORING CONFIG 7 DISPLAY CONFIG 32 AAV49426 04 2014 2 ACCESS LEVEL LAC With integrated display terminal Power up m Displays the state of the drive bAS Limited access to SIM SUP SEt FCS USr COd and LAC menus Only one function can be
174. O 2 Configurations No nO No switching L11 LI1 to LI6 LI7 LI7 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C111 C111 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus C211 C211 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen C311 C311 to C315 C315 With a communication card C411 C411 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card E Switching of 2 motors or 2 configurations Configurations No nO No switching L11 LI1 to LI6 LI6 LI7 LI7 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C111 C111 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus C211 C211 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen C311 C311 to C315 C315 With a communication card C411 C411 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card Switching of 3 motors or 3 configurations Note In order to obtain 3 motors or 3 configurations 2 Configurations CnF 1 must also be configured 226 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Traverse control Function for winding reels of yarn in textile applications Traverse control drive Winding drive Reel of yarn Gearbox Main shaft Winding mo
175. P 158 REFERENCE SWITCH 156 ROLLBACK MGT 188 Rope slack 194 RP CONFIGURATION 118 REGEN CONNECTION 239 Save reference 174 STOP CONFIGURATION 162 Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch 218 Summing input Subtracting input Multiplier 155 Synchronous motor parameters 87 Torque limitation 208 Torque regulation 205 Traverse control 221 Use of the Pulse input input to measure the speed of rotation of the motor 259 AAV49426 04 2014 303 Index of parameter codes Code Page 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Geis 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT F Un 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT egg 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL EES leB 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 1 SIMPLY START con 5 1 2 MONITORING SUP 1 3 SETTINGS SEE 1 6 COMMAND EEL 4 PASSWORD C Od HIL led re fe RJL AC 56 160 173 202 I Go Co gt ACC 45 56 Hdd 25 gp IND N D gt 99 m Es Ex 99 Ea 225 es ITF Ix Es rr gt 99 EN Ex 53 IZE 125 IZE I3H 53 I3E I3F 131 135 IYA 53 IHE IYL 145 IHE IE 1 52 54 ANDA 268 268 EX ER gt e erg En gt
176. Parameter 4 Parameter 5 Parameter 6 Parameter 7 Parameter 8 Parameter 9 Parameter 10 Parameter 11 Parameter 12 Parameter 13 Parameter 14 Parameter 15 Input LI or bit or frequency threshold 0 1 Oor 1 2 values Input LI or bit or frequency threshold 0 0 1 3 values Note Do modify the parameters in 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu because any modifications made in this menu 1 3 SETTINGS SEt will be lost on the next power up The parameters can be adjusted during operation in the PARAM SET SWITCHING MLP menu on the active configuration Note Parameter set switching cannot be configured from the integrated display terminal Parameters can only be adjusted on the integrated display terminal if the function has been configured previously via the graphic display terminal by PC Software or via the bus or communication network If the function has not been configured the MLP menu and the PS1 PS2 PS3 submenus will not appear AAV49426 04 2014 221 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 2 parameter sets No nO Function inactive Freq Th att Switching via Freq threshold Ftd page 70 Freq Th 2 attain F2A Switching via Freq threshold 2 Ftd page 70 O Ramp Mode Switching during braking sequence This new assignment allows to put higher gain when the brake is open and before the s
177. Preset references via logic inputs rP2 rP3 rP4 n accordance with the configuration of Act internal PID ref PII pages 200 Internal reference or Reference A Fr1 or Fr1b see page 140 Combination table for preset PID references LI Pr4 LI Pr2 Pr2 lt nO Reference rPI or A 0 rPl or A 0 1 rP2 1 0 rP3 1 1 rP4 A predictive speed reference can be used to initialize the speed on restarting the process 196 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Scaling of feedback and references PIF1 PIF2 parameters Can be used to scale the PID feedback sensor range This scale MUST be maintained for all other parameters PIP1 PIP2 parameters Can be used to scale the adjustment range i e the reference The adjustment range MUST lie within the sensor range The maximum value of the scaling parameters is 32767 To facilitate installation we recommend using values as close as possible to this maximum level while retaining powers of 10 in relation to the actual values Example see graph below Adjustment of the volume in a tank between 6 m and 15 Sensor used 4 20 mA 4 5 m for 4 mA 20 m for 20 mA with the result that PIF1 4500 and PIF2 20000 Adjustment range 6 to 15 m with the result that PIP1 lt 6000 min reference and PIP2 lt 15000 max reference Example references rP1 internal reference 9500 rp2 preset reference 6500 rP3
178. RC FLASH During auto tuning the motor operates at rated current Do not service the motor during auto tuning Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL It is essential that the following parameters Rated motor volt UnS Rated motor freq FrS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor speed nSP and Rated motor power nPr are correctly configured before starting auto tuning for asynchronous motor e Itis essential that the following parameters Nominal sync nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS and Syn EMF constant PHS are correctly configured before starting auto tuning for synchronous motor Autotune L d axis LdS and Autotune L q axis LqS shall be configured if Tune type tUnt is not set to ALL ALL see page 86 When one or more of these parameters have been changed after auto tuning has been performed Auto tuning tUn will return No nO and the procedure will have to be repeated Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury L1 No nO Auto tuning not performed L1 Yes YES Auto tuning is performed as soon as possible then the parameter automatically changes to Done dOnE Done dOnE Use of the values given the last time auto tuning was performed note Auto tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated If a freewheel
179. RT 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD ENT 2 721 5 5 Summary of functions REFERENCE SWITCH 156 Displays the state of the drive gt REF OPERATIONS 157 RAMP 158 SERS STOP CONFIGURATION 162 AUTO DC INJECTION 164 JOL JOG 166 P55 PRESET SPEEDS 168 UPd SPEED 171 SPEED AROUND REF 178 SPN MEMO REFERENCE 174 LSE LIMIT SWITCHES 176 BLE BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL 181 rbh ROLLBACK MGT 188 ELM EXTERNAL WEIGHT MEAS 190 HSA HIGH SPEED HOISTING 195 1 PID REGULATOR 200 de PID PRESET REFERENCES 204 bOr TORQUE CONTROL 206 EDL TORQUE LIMITATION 209 CL pe 2nd CURRENT LIMIT 241 LLES LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND 213 Occ OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD 215 LIB POSITIONING BY SENSORS 219 HLP PARAM SET SWITCHING 222 MULTIMOTORS CONFIG 226 TRAVERSE CONTROL 232 INSPECTION MODE 234 rFE EVACUATION 235 HFF HALF FLOOR 236 dE U DC BUS SUPPLY 237 EDP TOP Z MANAGEMENT 238 REGEN CONNECTION 239 150 AAV49426 04
180. S Type of stop in the event of an external fault O Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 162 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 108 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 151 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 252 AAV49426 04 2014 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting UnderV fault mgt FIt amp R open 0 Behavior of the drive in the eve
181. SS OF CONTROL t is essential that the following parameters Rated motor volt UnS Rated motor freq FrS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor speed nSP and Rated motor power nPr are correctly configured before starting auto tuning for asynchronous motor It is essential that the following parameters Nominal sync nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS and Syn EMF constant PHS are correctly configured before starting auto tuning for synchronous motor Autotune L d axis LdS and Autotune L q axis LqS shall be configured if Tune type tUnt is not set to ALL ALL see page 86 When one or more of these parameters have been changed after auto tuning has been performed Auto tuning tUn will return No nO and the procedure will have to be repeated Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury L1 No nO Auto tuning not performed O Yes YES Auto tuning is performed as soon as possible then the parameter automatically changes to Done dOnE O Done dOnE Use of the values given the last time auto tuning was performed Note Auto tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated If a freewheel stop or fast stop function has been assigned to a logic input this input must be inactive Auto tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands which will be taken into account after the auto tuning sequence
182. Switched on state Ramp stop rMp the drive stops on ramp when going from Operation enable to Switched on state 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate 3 Warning These settings are independent of the AUTO DC INJECTION AdC function Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 163 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Auto DC injection Yes YES Automatic current injection on stopping at the end of the ramp L1 No nO No injection Yes YES Adjustable injection time Continuous Ct Continuous standstill injection Warning There is an interlock between this function and Motor fluxing FLU page 91 If Motor fluxing FLU Continuous Auto DC injection Adc must be No nO Note This parameter gives rise to the injection of current even if a run command has not been sent It can be accessed with the drive running Auto DC inj level 1 E Qu Level of standstill DC injection current This parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC is not No nO and cannot be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY This parameter is forced to 0 if Motor control type Ctt page 72 Syn
183. TION MONITORING Examples include Display of 2 digital values RUN Term 35 00Hz Motor speed 80A 1250 rpm Motor current 80A Display of 2 bar graphs Display of a list of 5 values RUN 35 00Hz 80A Min Motor speed max 1250 rpm 1500 Sl i Motor current max 80A 150 RUN Term 35 00Hz 80 MONITORING Frequency ref Motor current Term 50 1Hz 80A Motor speed 1250 rpm Motor thermal state Drv thermal state AAV49426 04 2014 285 16 MONITORING CONFIG Name Description Word 1 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt gt gt F2 and F3 keys and rotating the navigation button Format word 1 Format of word 1 Hex Hexadecimal Signed Decimal with sign O Unsigned Decimal without sign Word 2 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt gt gt F2 and F3 keys and rotating the navigation button Format word 2 Format of word 2 O Hex Hexadecimal O Signed Decimal with sign O Unsigned Decimal without sign Word 3 add select Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt gt gt F2 and F3 keys and rotating the navigation button Format word 3 Format of word 3 L1 Hex Hexadecimal Signed Decimal with sign O Unsigned Decimal without sign Word 4 add select S
184. Type of stop Stt DC injection dCI or if DC injection assign dCI is not No nO CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage DC injection time 1 Ge Maximum current injection time DC inject level 1 IdC After this time the injection current becomes DC inject level 2 IdC2 The parameter can be accessed if Type of stop Stt DC injection 4 or if DC injection assign dCI is not No nO DC inject level 2 Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode once period of time DC injection time 1 tdl has elapsed The parameter be accessed if Type of stop Stt DC injection 4 or if DC injection assign dCI is not No nO CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 0 5s DC injection time 2 1 3 0 1 to 30 s Maximum injection time DC inject level 2 IdC2 for injection selected as stop mode only The parameter can be accessed if Stop type Stt DC injection 4 Dis operat opt code COST UM Disable operation stop mode Freewheel nSt the drive stops in freewheel when going from Operation enable to
185. active if tLS 0 or if rSL 0 A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that unintended restarts will not present any danger Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 203 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 2 preset PID ref No nO Function inactive O L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the function is inactive If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active 4 preset PID ref No nO Make sure that 2 preset PID ref Pr2 has been assigned before assigning this fun L1 No nO Function inactive HS CEST See the assignment conditions on page 145 If the assigned input or bit is at O the function is inactive If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the function is active ction 2 preset PID ref 1 The parameter be accessed if Preset ref PID 2 Pr2 is assigned Adjustment range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 2 3 preset PID ref 1 600 The parameter can be accessed if Preset ref PID 4 Pr4 is assigned Adjustm
186. agnetizing current This parameter is used to increase or reduce the time taken to establish the torque It allows gradual adjustment up to the frequency set by Action Boost FAb Negative values apply particularly to tapered rotor motors Magnetizing current Positive Boost bOO Rated magnetizing current Negative Boost DOO gt Frequency Action Boost FAb Action Boost 0 The parameter can be accessed if ACCESS LEVEL Expert and if Motor control type Ctt 72 is different from Sync CL FSY Frequency above which the magnetizing current is not longer affected by Boost 600 IR compensation 1 25 to 200 100 This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 is not V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 Used to optimize the torque at very low speed increase IR compensation UFr if the torque is insufficient Check that the IR compensation UFr value is not too high when the motor is warm risk of instability Noise reduction According to rating L1 No nO Fixed frequency Factory setting at and above 55 kW 75 HP for ATV71eeeM3X and at and above 90 kW 120 HP for ATV71eeeN4 O Yes YES Frequency with random modulation Factory setting up to 45 kW 60 HP for ATV71eeeM3X and up to 75 kW 100 HP for the ATV71eeeN4 Random frequency modulation prevents any resonance which may occur at a fixed frequency 1 Parameter
187. alues input values The minimum value corresponds to a minimum reference of 096 and the maximum value to a maximum reference of 10096 The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value It may also be negative Reference Reference 100 100 96 Frequency input 0 f T t gt 0 input Freq min value Freq max value 300 kHz Freq max value Freq min value 300 kHz EIL EFr EFr EIL Reference A 100 Frequency gt Freq min value 0 Freq max value 300 kHz input EIL reference can be obtained at zero frequency by assigning a negative value to the minimum value AAV49426 04 2014 119 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O The encoder configuration can also be accessed in the 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu Note 1 When an encoder is used with a VW3A3408 VW3A3409 card it is only possible to configure the encoder input for speed feedback Functions only be configured as references inputs with a VW3A3401 to 407 or VW3A3411 Note 2 When an encoder is used with a VW3A3409 card the drive remains locked in stop mode displays nSt or nLP if the encoder is not fully configured Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Encoder type AABB AAbb This parameter can be accessed if an incremental encoder card has been inserted To be configured in accordance with the
188. an be used to control the precharging contactor via a relay or a logic input on the drive Example circuit using R2 relay Contactor power supply A1 A2 A1 des NES e kd N 2 Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Precharge cont ass Logic output or control relay No nO Function not assigned LO1 LO1 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted dO 1 dO 1 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO 1 assignment AO1 page 132 7 No nO Ej AAV49426 04 2014 237 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Top Z management This function is only accessible if an encoder card VW3 411 has been inserted and if Encoder type EnS AABB AAbb This function can be used to make homing but it is necessary to have an approach speed low otherwise the drive trips in Overbraking ObF fault Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Stop on top 21 Note This function cannot be used with certain other functions Follow the instructions on page 151 L1 No nO Not assigned L11 L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 The stop is activated when the input changes to 1 or t
189. and 3 times the rated motor torque Uns TrqRef Utr Signed torque reference between 3 and 3 times the rated motor torque Torque lim tqL Torque limit between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque Motor volt UOP Voltage applied to the motor between 0 and Rated motor volt UnS dO 1 dO 1 Assignment to a logic output This assignment can only appear if 001 assignment dO1 page 129 has been assigned This is the only possible choice in this case and is only displayed for informational purposes AO1 Type Current 0A E Voltage 10U Voltage output Current 0 Current output AO1 min Output 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if AO1 Type AO1t Current AO1 max Output 0 to 20 0 mA The parameter can be accessed if AO1 Type AO1t Current 0A AO1 min Output 0 to 10 0 V The parameter can be accessed if AO1 Type AO1t Voltage 100 AO1 max Output 0 to 10 0 V The parameter can be accessed if AO1 Type AO1t Voltage 100 132 AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Scaling AO1 min 0 to 100 0 Factory setting 0 Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maxiumum possible variation Scaling AO1 max 0 to 100 0 100 0 90 Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parame
190. and its current values It can be accessed with the integrated display terminal Spares and repairs Consult Schneider Electric product support AAV49426 04 2014 293 Faults Causes Remedies Drive does not start no fault displayed the display does not light up check the power supply to the drive The assignment of the Fast stop or Freewheel functions will prevent the drive starting if the corresponding logic inputs are not powered up The ATV71 then displays Freewheel nSt in freewheel stop and Fast stop FSt in fast stop This is normal since these functions are active at zero so that the drive will be stopped safely if there is a wire break Make sure that the run command input or inputs are activated in accordance with the selected control mode 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt parameters page 108 If an input is assigned to the limit switch function and this input is at zero the drive can only be started up by sending a command for the opposite direction see pages 175 and 216 If the reference channel or command channel is assigned to a communication bus when the power supply is connected the drive will display Freewheel nSt and remain in stop mode until the communication bus sends a command When an encoder is used with a VW3A3409 card if the encoder is not fully configured the drive remains locked in stop mode displays NST nSt or NLP nLP Faults which cannot be reset automa
191. andard mot freq bFr 60Hz NEMA 60 According to drive According to drive 4 Rated motor volt rating rating and Standard mot freq bFr Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate ATV71eeeM3 100 to 240 V ATV71eeeN4 200 to 480 V ATV71eeeS6X 400 to 600 ATV71eeeY 400 to 690 V 0 25 to 1 5 In 1 According to drive rating and Standard mot freq bFr Rated mot current Rated motor current given on the nameplate Rated motor freq IM tonius PUDE Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate The factory setting is 50 Hz or preset to 60 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr is set to 60 Hz 0 to 60000 RPM According to drive rating Rated motor speed Rated motor speed given on the nameplate to 9999 rpm then 10 00 to 60 00 krpm on the integrated display terminal If rather than the rated speed the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a 96 calculate the rated speed as follows 100 slip as a 96 100 50 slip in Hz 50 60 slip in Hz 60 Nominal speed lt Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed lt Synchronous speed x or Nominal speed lt Synchronous speed x 50 Hz motors 60 Hz motors g Max frequency 10 to 599 Hz 60 Hz The factory setting is 60 Hz or preset to 72 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr is set to 60 Hz The maximum value is limited by the following conditions It must not exceed 10 times
192. annot be set for the No drive flt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 126 AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LO1 assignment Identical to R1 see page 124 with the addition of shown for information only as these selections can only be configured in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu Brk control Brake contactor control Input cont LLC Line contactor control Output cont OCC Output contactor control End reel EbO End of reel traverse control function Sync wobble tSY Counter wobble synchronization DC charging dCO DC bus precharging contactor control LO1 delay time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at O The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true LO1 active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No dri
193. arameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 AAV49426 04 2014 79 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description V F profile setting F2 U3 VIF profile setting a F3 04 VIF profile setting F4 05 VIF profile setting F5 VIF profile setting VIF profile setting VIF profile setting VIF profile setting Adjustment range Factory setting 0 to 800 or 1000 V according to rating This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt lt V F 5pts UF5 0 to 599 Hz 0 This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt lt V F 5pts UF5 0 to 800 or 1000 V 0 according to rating This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 0 to 599 Hz 0 This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt lt V F 5pts UF5 0 to 800 or 1000 V 0 according to rating This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt lt V F 5pts UF5 0 to 599 Hz 0 This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 0 to 800 or 1000 V 0 according to rating This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt lt V F 5pts UF5 0 to 599 Hz 0 This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt lt V F 5pts UF5 80 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Descript
194. assigned to each input Std Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal Only one function can be assigned to each input AdU Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal Several functions can be assigned to each input EPr Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal and access to additional parameters Several functions can be assigned to each input AAV49426 04 2014 33 2 ACCESS LEVEL LAC Comparison of the menus that can be accessed on the graphic display terminal integrated display terminal Graphic display terminal Integrated display terminal Access level 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU A single function can be assigned to each input L RE Access level E Od Password 5 IN Simply start 5 Monitoring SEE Settings F E 5 Factory settings User menu A single function can be assigned to each input Basic bA 5 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD 1 16 MONITORING CONFIG A single function can be assigned to each input dr E Motor control 1 0 configuration EEL Command F Un
195. at the parameters configured are consistent in particular you should check that the required distance is possible This function does not replace the stop limit switch which remains necessary for safety reasons Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury 218 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Stop FW limit sw No nO Not assigned L11 LI1 to LI6 LI7 LI7 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 1114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD13 Cd13 In profile IO can be switched with possible logic inputs CD14 Cd14 to CD15 Cd15 In profile IO can be switched without logic inputs L1 EI EI EJ EJ EJ EI D P1 E Stop RV limit sw Na nO Same assignments possible as for Stop FW limit sw SAF above Stop limit config Active high HIG The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one stop sensor has been assigned It defines the
196. atic slip compensation according to the load This type of control is recommended when replacing an ATV58 It supports operation with a number of motors connected in parallel on the same drive if the motors are identical SVC I CUC Open loop current flux vector control This type of control is recommended when replacing an ATV58F used in an open loop configuration It does not support operation with a number of motors connected in parallel on the same drive FVC FUC Closed loop current flux vector control for motor with encoder This selection is only possible if an encoder card has been inserted This function is not possible however when using an incremental encoder that generates signal A only This type of control is recommended when replacing an ATV58F used in a closed loop configuration It provides better performance in terms of speed and torque accuracy and enables torque to be obtained at zero speed It does not support operation with a number of motors connected in parallel on the same drive is essential that the encoder check detailed on page 76 is performed successfully before selecting FVC FUC 2pts UF2 Simple V F profile without slip compensation It supports operation with Special motors wound rotor tapered rotor etc number of motors in parallel on the same drive High speed motors Motors with a low power rating in comparison to that of the drive Voltage Uns The pr
197. be configured before any other parameters The 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM menu should be configured on its own or before the other drive configuration menus If a modification has previously been made to any of them in particular in 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC some 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM parameters may be changed for example the motor parameters if a synchronous motor has been selected Returning to the 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM menu after modifying another drive configuration menu is unnecessary but does not pose any risk Changes following modification of another configuration menu are not described to avoid unnecessary complication in this section Macro configuration Macro configuration provides a means of speeding up the configuration of functions for a specific field of application 8 macro configurations are available Start stop factory configuration Handling General use Hoisting Lifts PID regulator Communication bus Master slave Selecting a macro configuration assigns the parameters in this macro configuration Each macro configuration can still be modified in the other menus 38 AAV49426 04 2014 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Macro configuration parameters Assignment of the inputs outputs 1 To start up with integrated Modbus Modbus Address Add must first be c
198. bit resolution Entr page 122 SSI code type SSCd page 123 Encoder filter activ FFA page 123 Encoder filter value FFr page 123 Menu 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun Removal of the following parameters now located in the 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu Motor fluxing FLU Fluxing assignment FLI Auto tune assign tUL AAV49426 04 2014 Software enhancements Enhancements made to version V1 9 8383 in comparison to V1 7 5383 New parameters and functions Menu 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC New method of assigning Angle setting type ASt page 92 optimised measurement without motion with memorization New parameter App Inertia Coef JACO page 95 Removal from the sub menu ASYNC MOTOR ASY of the following parameters now located directly in the 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu Boost DOO page 101 Action Boost FAb page 101 Menu 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS I O New encoder parameters Coder rotation inv Enrl page 120 Clock frequency EnSP page 123 Menu 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun New method of assigning for the parameters set switching 2 Parameter sets CHA1 page 222 and 3 Parameter sets CHA2 page 222 switching during braking sequence This new assignment allows to put higher gain when the brake is open and before the starting of the ramp useful for lift application New sub menu TOP 2 MANAGEMENT tOP page
199. c mot SYn CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Auto DC inj time 1 o vuU ps Standstill injection time The parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC is not No nO If Motor control type Ctt page 72 FVC FUC or Sync mot SYn this time corresponds to the zero speed maintenance time Auto DC inj level 2 1 0 to 1 2 In 2 0 5 In 2 219 level of standstill DC injection current This parameter can be accessed if Auto DC injection AdC is not No nO and cannot be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY This parameter is forced to O if Motor control type Ctt page 72 Sync mot SYn CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 164 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 010 30 5 Auto DC inj time 2 2 d standstill injection time The parameter
200. can IN1 address Address of the 18 input word Scan IN2 address Address of the 2 input word Scan IN3 address Address of the 3 input word Scan IN4 address Address of the 4 input word Scan IN5 address Address of the 5 input word Scan IN6 address Address of the 6 input word Scan IN7 address Address of the 7 input word Scan IN8 address Address of the 81 input word Scan Out1 address Address of the 1 output word Scan Out2 address Address of the 209 output word Scan Out3 address Address of the 3 output word Scan Out4 address Address of the 4 output word Scan Out5 address Address of the 5 output word Scan Out6 address Address of the 6 output word Scan Out7 address Address of the 7 output word Scan Out8 address Address of the 8 output word AAV49426 04 2014 267 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting HMI baud rate 19 2 kbps 9 6 or 19 2 kbps via the integrated display terminal 9600 or 19200 bauds via the graphic display terminal The graphic display terminal only operates if HMI baud rate tbr2 19200 bauds 19 2 kbps In order for any change in the assignment of HMI baud rate tbr2 to be taken into account you must Provide confirmation in a confirma
201. can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 101 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Motor surge limit This function limits motor overvoltages and is useful in the following applications NEMA motors Spindle motors Rewound motors L1 No nO Function inactive Yes YES Function active This parameter is forced to No nO if Sinus filter page 74 7 Yes YES This parameter can remain lt No nO for 230 400 V motors used at 230 V or if the length of cable between the drive and the motor does not exceed 4m with unshielded cables 10 m with shielded cables Volt surge limit opt Optimization parameter for transient overvoltages at the motor terminals Accessible if Motor surge limit SUL Yes YES Set to 6 8 or 10 according to the following table The value of the SOP parameter corresponds to the attenuation time of the cable used It is defined to prevent the superimposition of voltage wave reflections resulting from long cable lengths It limits overvoltages to twice the DC bus rated voltage The tables on the following page give examples of correspondence between the SOP parameter and the length of the cable between the drive and the motor For longer cable lengths a sinus filter or a dV dt protection filter must be used
202. ccessed if High speed hoisting HSO I Limit CSO The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 63 is less than 2 kHz Note Ifthe setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss OPF fault mode NE if this has been enabled see page 249 0 to 500 or 599 Hz 40 Hz according to rating I Limit frequency Frequency threshold above which the high speed limitation current is active The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO Limit CSO Rope slack config Rope slack function The parameter can be accessed if High speed hoisting HSO is No nO No nO Function inactive Drive estim drl Measurement of the load by estimating the torque generated by the drive Ext sensor PES Measurement of the load using a weight sensor can only be assigned if Weight sensor ass PES page 190 is not No nO Note Operation will only be optimized if High speed hoisting HSO Speed SSO 0 to 100 0 Rope slack trq level Adjustment threshold corresponding to a load weighing slightly upper than the hook when off load as a of the rated load The parameter can be accessed if Rope slack trq level rSd has been assigned 1 Rated motor freq FrS page 78 for an asynchronous motor or Nominal freq sync FrSS page 87 for a synchronous motor 2 In
203. cessed if Torque limit activ tLA No nO 10 to 300 Pmax Generator Maximum power in generator mode The parameter cannot be accessed if Torque limit activ No nO 210 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Current limit 2 No nO Function inactive O L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 If the assigned input or bit is at O the first current limitation is active If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the second current limitation is active g Limit 2 value 1 0 to 1 65 In 2 1 5 In 2 Second current limitation The parameter can be accessed if Current limit 2 LC2 is not No nO The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 63 is less than 2 kHz Note setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss fault mode if this has been enabled see page 249 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect CAUTION OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating requirements in determining the current limit Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment
204. channel Fr1 active ch2 active 2 no switching Ref 2 channel Fr2 active O L11 1 See the assignment conditions on page 145 not to CD14 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 channel Ref 1 channel Fr1 is active If the assigned bit or input is at 1 channel Ref 2 channel Fr2 is active Ref 2 channel No nO No nO Not assigned If Profile CHCF Not separ SIM the command is at the terminals with a zero reference If Profile CHCF Separate SEP or I O profile IO the reference is zero 11 11 Analog input 12 A12 Analog input 13 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Speed UPdt Speed command HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted EE 7 AAV49426 04 2014 147 1 6 COMMAND CtL Name Description Adjustment range Copy channel 1 lt gt 2 Can be used to copy the current reference and or the command by means of switching in order
205. command has been given 1 1 If a movement occurs for which no command has been given the drive switches to zero speed regulation with no brake release command and a bSA alarm is triggered 010 5 00 5 05 Current ramp time Torque current ramp time increase and decrease for a current variation equal to Brake release FW Ibr Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 185 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range b4 freq 0 1 to 10 Hz Parameter can only be modified in ACCESS LEVEL Expert mode If BRH_b4 brH4 BRH b4 freq bFtd represent the threshold level for BRH_b4 brH4 BRH b4 freq bFtd value depends from the installation mechanical response If BRH b4 freq bFtd is too low the drive may rise Load mvt al oSA when not needed If BRH 04 freq bFtd is too high a slip of the load may occur without Load mvt al DSA alarm WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL If the setting is too low the BRH 541 brH4 function might be activated untimely If the setting is too high the 041 brH4 function might notbe activated when required Check and control that the setting is convenient for the application Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has bee
206. current Set Tune type tUnt to ALL ALL Cold stator resistance d and q axis stator self inductance are measured during this autotuning 2 Perform the tune Do an Auto tuning see page 85 Note the Autotune L d axis LdS and Autotune L q axis LqS values Check the value of the synchronous motor saliency Ld Saliency 0 96 to 25 Low salency Saliency 25 to 50 Medium saliency Saliency 1 Lq Saliency 50 96 High saliency If saliency is 2596 follow the procedure below 4 Adjust PHS without going throught step 3 If saliency is gt 2596 follow the procedure below 3 Improve the tune result and 4 Adjust PHS 3 Improve the tune results CAUTION OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating requirements in determining the current limit Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Set PSI align curr max MCr conforming to the maximum motor current The maximum value of PSI align curr max MCr is limited by Current Limitation CLI Without information set PSI align curr max MCr to Auto AUtO see page 86 Doa second Auto tuning tUn after the PSI align curr max MCr modification 4 Adjust PHS Adjust Syn EMF constant PHS to
207. current limitation O Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 162 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 108 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 151 Trg l limit time out 011o 2999 If fault has been configured Time delay for taking SSF Limitation fault into account Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication 258 A
208. d set 2 Ibr e g ascent always with a load and descent always without a load 2 Brake release current Ibr and Ird if BIP 2 Ibr Adjust the brake release current to the rated current indicated on the motor During testing adjust the brake release current in order to hold the load smoothly 3 Acceleration time For hoisting applications it is advisable to set the acceleration ramps to more than 0 5 seconds Ensure that the drive does not exceed the current limit The same recommendation applies for deceleration Reminder For a hoisting movement a braking resistor should be used 4 Brake release time brt Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release 5 Brake release frequency blr in open loop mode only Leave in Auto adjust if necessary 6 Brake engage frequency bEn Leave in Auto adjust if necessary 7 Brake engage time bEt Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage Recommended settings for brake logic control for a horizontal hoisting application 1 Brake impulse bIP No 2 Brake release current Ibr Set to 0 3 Brake release time brt Set according to the type of brake It is the time required for the mechanical brake to release 4 Brake engage frequency bEn in open loop mode only Leave in Auto adjust if necessary 5 Brake engage time bEt Set according to the type of brake It
209. d PDO2 4 Transmit PDO2 1 ooooo PDO images are only visible if CANopen has been enabled address other than OFF and if the PDOs are active Transmit PDODD Transmit PDO2 3 Transmit PDO2 4 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 PDO3 IMAGE Received PDO3 1 FDBA Hex Received PDO3 2 Received PDO3 3 Received PDO3 4 Transmit PDO3 1 Transmit PDO3 2 Transmit PDO3 3 Transmit PDO3 4 50 AAV49426 04 2014 1 2 MONITORING SUP With graphic display terminal Communication continued RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 COMMUNICATION MAP Command Channel Modbus Cmd value ABCD Hex Active ref channel CANopen Frequency ref 12 5 Hz ETA state word 2153 Hex W3141 F230 Hex W2050 F230 Hex W4325 F230 Hex WO0894 F230 Hex COM SCANNER INPUT MAP COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP CMD WORD IMAGE FREQ REF WORD MAP MODBUS NETWORK DIAG MODBUS HMI DIAG CANopen MAP PROG CARD SCANNER RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 Input scanner scan 1 scan in2 scan in3 Controller Inside card RUN Term 50 00 2 Input scanner Prg card scan in6 0 Output scanner Prg card scan in7 0 Prg card scan in8 0 scan in4 80A scan in5 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 Output scanner PLC card scan Ou PLC card scan Ou PLC card scan Ou PLC card scan Ou PLC card scan Ou PLC card scan Out6 0 PLC card scan Out7 0 PLC card scan 8 0 Input scanner and Out
210. d feedback for regulation and monitoring This configuration is automatic if the drive is configured for closed loop operation Motor control type Ctt lt FVC FUC Sync CL FSY If Motor control type Ctt SVC V the encoder operates in speed feedback mode and enables static correction of the speed to be performed This configuration is not accessible for other Motor control type Ctt values Speed PGr The encoder provides a reference Can only be selected with an incremental encoder card 1 The encoder parameters can only be accessed if the encoder card has been inserted and the available selections will depend on the type of encoder card used The encoder configuration can also be accessed in the 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O menu AAV49426 04 2014 77 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Asynchronous motor parameters These parameters can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 SVC V UUC SVC I FVC FUC V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 In this case the synchronous motor parameters cannot be accessed Name Description Adjustment range N Rated motor power Acc to drive rating Rated motor power given on the nameplate in kW if Standard mot freq bFr 50Hz IEC 50 in HP if Standard mot freq bFr 60Hz NEMA 60 Rated motor Acc to drive rating Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate ATV71eeeM3X 100 to 240 V
211. d for the other operating direction once the motor has stopped If the two inputs Stop FW limit sw LAF and Stop RV limit sw LAr are assigned and at state 0 restarting will be impossible The parameter can be accessed if Stop FW limit sw LAF or Stop RV limit sw LAr is assigned 176 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Brake logic control Used to control an electromagnetic brake by the drive for horizontal and vertical hoisting applications and for unbalanced machines Principle Vertical hoisting movement Maintain motor torque in the driving load holding direction during brake opening and closing in order to hold the load start smoothly when the brake is released and stop smoothly when the brake is engaged Horizontal movement Synchronize brake release with the build up of torque during startup and brake engage at zero speed on stopping to prevent jolting Recommended settings for brake logic control for a vertical hoisting application A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that the selected settings and configurations will not result in the dropping or loss of control of the load being lifted Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 1 Brake impulse bIP YES Ensure that the direction of rotation FW corresponds to lifting the load For applications in which the load being lowered is very different from the load being lifte
212. d sharing factor is determined by the torque and speed with two factors K1 and K2 K1 x K2 K1 Speed LBC1 LBC2 K2 4 cee LBC3 Torque Rated torque x 1 LBC3 NT LBC AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC 1 to 200 Hz Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting el Correction spd 0 to 598 9 Hz 0 The parameter can be accessed if Load sharing LbA lt Yes YES Minimum speed for load correction in Hz Below this threshold no corrections are made Used to prevent correction at very low speed if this would hamper rotation of the motor i iE S Correction min spd 0 1 Correction spd LbC4 0 1 at 599 Hz The parameter can be accessed if Load sharing LbA Yes YES Speed threshold in Hz above which maximum load correction is applied 0 0 Leca Torque offset oito 9 The parameter can be accessed if Load sharing LbA lt Yes YES Minimum torque for load correction as a 96 of the rated torque Below this threshold no corrections are made Used to avoid torque instabilities when the torque direction is not constant g Sharing filter 100 ms to 20 s 100 ms The parameter can be accessed if Load sharing LbA lt Yes YES Time constant filter for correction in ms Used in the event of flexible mechanical coupling in order to avoid instabilities b Eu Current bandwith
213. damage Current Limitation n O toit 6S Inita First current limitation The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 63 is less than 2 kHz Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss fault mode if this has been enabled see page 249 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect CAUTION OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating requirements in determining the current limit Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 211 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Line contactor command The line contactor closes every time a run command forward or reverse is sent and opens after every stop as soon as the drive is locked For example if the stop mode is stop on ramp the contactor will open when the motor reaches zero speed Note The drive control power supply must be provided an
214. dapt brA No nO or Yes YES see page 161 CAUTION Do not use High torq B dYnB or High torq C d YnC configurations if the motor is a permanent magnet synchronous motor as it will be demagnetized Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage AAV49426 04 2014 161 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting SET Type of stop Ramp stop rMP Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command O Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop O Freewheel stop nSt Freewheel stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop Note If the brake logic function on page 181 has been enabled or if Low speed time out tLS page 64 or 203 is not 0 only ramp type stops may be configured Freewheel stop Thd 0 0 0 to 804 This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to freewheel stop below a low speed threshold It can be accessed if Type of stop Stt lt Fast stop FSt or Ramp stop rMP 0 0 Does not switch to freewheel stop 0 1 to 599 Hz Speed threshold below which the motor will switch to freewheel stop No nO Freewheel stop ass No nO Not assigned L11 LI1 to L16 LI6 LI7 LI7 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114
215. des Page 202 7 574 ISONILLAS 1 01 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 6 1 774 LNSWADVNVWN 81 ise N e e LONN Z1 e N N m ike ite iO N N N 132 GNVINWOD 9 0 1 549 SLNAdLNO SLNdNI 91 ae 10H1NOO HOLOM 435 soNILL3S 5NIHO LINOM 1 52 ul 5 LH V S L H Code bELd bEd bEn bEE bFr bFEd IP Ir bog brH HJ br HH bra brP brr brt bru b5p b5t bUb IE TE f f CS5 Ed CFPS CHA I CHAF CHN IE 0 ve CL AAV49426 04 2014 306 Index of parameter codes Page 202 7 282 574 ISONILLAS 1 01 NOLLVOINQWIAOO 6 1 774 LNSWADVNVWN 81 257 e LO N LONN NOILVOr1adv 71 lo 220 lo cH lo e c lt N ike CN
216. drC Parameters that can be accessed in Expert mode Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Feed forward This parameter can be accessed if Speed loop type SSL High perfor HPF Percentage of the high performance regulator feedforward term 10096 corresponds to the term calculated using the value of Application Inertia JAPL page 96 Bandwidth feedfor 20 to 500 This parameter can be accessed if Speed loop type SSL High perfor HPF Bandwidth of the high performance speed loop feedforward term as a percentage of the predefined value Q Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped Recommended procedure for setting the high performance speed loop 1 Enter the motor parameters If you subsequently modify one of these you will have to perform this whole procedure again 2 The value of the actual inertia being driven must be entered in the Application Inertia JAPL parameter page 96 Note If a motor parameter is modified the estimated inertia is recalculated and updated parameters Estim app inertia JESt and Inertia Mult Coef JMUL Application Inertia JAPL is also returned to its default value according to the new value of Estim app inertia JESt Check the speed loop response time by first setting Feed forward FFP to 0 see graphs on next page If necessary adjust the bandwidth and stability using parameters Fr Loop Stab
217. e 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu AAV49426 04 2014 139 1 6 COMMAND CtL Reference channel Not separ SIM Separate SEP and I O profile IO configurations PID configured with PID references at the terminals Ref 1B switching FLUE Fur Ref 1 channel ov nO Note Forced local is not 12 active in I O profile Ref 1B channel d PID AI3 Summing ref 2 See page 196 B LFr Al4 lt LCC4 Summing ref 3 SA e a Graphic display Subtract ref 2 terminal 1 5 Subtract ref 3 d lt LL LI 1 1 nO Ref 2 channel Fir 2 E e Channel 2 Low speed FLO Key Forced local Ref 2 switching Parameter The black square represents the factory setting assignment Instructions Fr1 Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card Frib for SEP and IO Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card 16 for SIM Terminals only accessible if Fr1 lt terminals SA2 SA3 dA2 dA3 Terminals only Fr2 Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card and speed 1 Ramps not active if the PI
218. e 168 P t PID regulator page 200 4 01 Traverse control page 232 1 JOG operation page 166 e e Brake logic control page 181 e e o 5 Catch on the fly page 246 e DC injection stop page 162 e e2 1 2 Fast stop page 162 2 t 2 Freewheel stop page 162 P Stop on top Z page 238 e2 e2 speed around a reference page 173 High speed hoisting page 195 Torque control page 206 1 1 1 1 e e 1 e e e Load sharing page 104 e e Positioning by sensors page 219 e e Open loop synchronous motor page 87 e e e Closed loop synchronous motor page 88 e Measure of the angle motor encoder page 89 5 1 Torque control and these functions are only incompatible while torque control mode is active 2 Priority is given to the first of these two stop modes to be activated 4 Only the multiplier reference is incompatible with the PID regulator 1 2 3 Excluding special application with reference channel Fr2 see diagrams on pages 139 and 140 4 5 5 2 functions are incompatible only if Angle setting type ASt W o load nLd e Incompatible functions Compatible functions Stop functions have priority over run commands Speed references via logic command have priority over analog refe
219. e 222 54 AAV49426 04 2014 1 3 SETTINGS SEt With graphic display terminal RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU RDY Term 0 00 0A 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 DRIVE MENU 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Code lt lt gt gt Quick With integrated display terminal Power up Ramp increment AAV49426 04 2014 55 1 3 SETTINGS SEt The adjustment parameters can be modified with the drive running or stopped A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that changes made to the settings during operation do not present any danger We recommend stopping the drive before making any changes Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Ramp increment 0 01 0 1 1 L1 0 01 ramp up to 99 99 seconds L1 0 1 ramp up to 999 9 seconds L1 1 ramp up to 6000 seconds This parameter is valid for Acceleration ACC Deceleration dEC Acceleration 2 AC2 and Deceleration 2 dE2 LI Acceleration 0 01 to 6000 s 1 3 0s Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS page 78 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven LI Deceleration 0 01 to 6000 s 1 3 0s Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq FrS page 78 to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with t
220. e control remains connected to the power supply Power ON rdS PTC probe faults are monitored while the drive power supply is connected Motor ON rS PTC probe faults are monitored while the motor power supply is connected PTC2 probe Can be accessed if a VW3A3202 option card has been inserted No nO Not used O Always AS probe faults are monitored permanently even if the power supply is not connected as long as the control remains connected to the power supply O Power ON rdS PTC probe faults are monitored while the drive power supply is connected L1 Motor ON rS PTC probe faults are monitored while the motor power supply is connected AAV49426 04 2014 243 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Fault reset Manual fault reset No nO Function inactive L11 LI1 to LI6 LI7 LI7 to L110 LI10 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 1114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C301 to C315 C315 With a communication card in I O profile IO C401 C401 to C415 C415 With a Controller Inside card in I O profile IO CD00 Cd00 to CD1
221. e motor rH speed trL master drive gt t 4 tSY SnC synchronization t 4 Winding motor speed un slave drive trL 230 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Connection of synchronization I O Master drive Slave drive SnCO LOe Q SnCI The starting conditions for the function are Base speeds reached on both drives Yarn control trC input activated Synchronization signal present Note On the slave drive the Quick step High GSH and Quick step Low qSL parameters should generally be left at zero AAV49426 04 2014 231 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Yarn control L1 No nO Function inactive thereby preventing access to other parameters L11 LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 145 The traverse control cycle starts when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 and stops when it changes to 0 Traverse freq high 1 0 to 10 Hz gt 0 to 10 Hz 0 to Traverse freq Quick step High high 1 0 to Traverse Freq Quick step Low Low 1 Traverse ctrl accel Traverse ctrl decel FEED eee Reel time 0 to 9999 minutes 0 minute Reel execution time Traverse Freq Low End reel No nO L1 No nO Function not assigned LO1 LO1 to
222. e navigation button is pressed It also returns to normal operation if the terminal exits the normal display mode for example if a fault occurs Power up menu Main menu Choose the menu which appears on the product menu when it is powered up Drive configuration Display the drive configuration Sim start Display the simply start menu Monitoring Display the monitoring menu Settings Display the setting menu Mot Ctrl Display the motor control menu I O Cont Display the inputs outputs configuration menu Command Display the command menu Appli fun Display the application function menu Fault mgt Display the fault management menu Com Display the communication menu Diagnostics Display the diagnostic menu Ident Display the identification menu Factory Set Display the factory setting User menu Display the user manu CI menu Display the drive menu Main menu Display the main menu EV ESSE ESTA ESAE Eo E E SE S AAV49426 04 2014 291 MULTIPOINT SCREEN Communication is possible between a graphic display terminal and a number of drives connected on the same bus The addresses of the drives must be configured in advance in the 1 9 COMMUNICATION menu using the Modbus Address Add parameter page 268 When a number of drives are connected to the same display terminal the terminal automatically displays the following screens
223. e opening and prior the launch of the speed ramp for the rollback control stabilizes the elevator position AAV49426 04 2014 187 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Nom Description Adjustment range Factory setting Rollback MGT Activation of the Rollback management function No nO Yes YES Rbk Compensation 0 1000 96 100 96 Parameter can be accessed if reference channel Rollback MGT rbM Yes YES Proportionnal gain of the position controller Rbk Damping 0 1000 100 90 Parameter can only be accessed in ACCESS LEVEL Expert mode and if reference channel Rollback MGT rbM Yes YES Differential gain of the position controller Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 188 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Load measurement This function uses the information supplied by a weight sensor to adapt the current Brake release FW Ibr of the BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL bLC function The signal from the weight sensor can be assigned to an analog input usually a 4 20 mA signal to the pulse in input or to the encoder input according to the type of weight sensor Examples Measurement of the total weight of a hoisting winch and its load Measurement of the total weight of an elevator winch the cabin and counterweight The current Brake release FW Ibr is adapted in accordanc
224. e rated torque can be accessed if the function has been configured in Hz in Hz The measured motor speed is displayed if an encoder card has been inserted otherwise 0 appears in Hz Frequency of the Pulse input input used by the FREQUENCY METER FqF function page 260 in A in Hz The parameter can be accessed if ENA system EnA 7 Yes YES see page 100 in rpm in V as a of the rated power as a 96 of the rated torque in V Line voltage from the point of view of the DC bus motor running or stopped as a as a as a can be accessed if DB res protection brO has been enabled see page 263 in Wh kWh or MWh accumulated consumption in seconds minutes or hours length of time the motor has been switched on in seconds minutes or hours length of time the drive has been switched on in seconds length of time the IGBT temperature alarm has been active as a process value can be accessed if the PID function has been configured as a process value can be accessed if the PID function has been configured as a process value can be accessed if the PID function has been configured in Hz can be accessed if the PID function has been configured Current date and time generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Words generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Active configuration Config n 0 1 or 2 Set n 1
225. e with the curve below d Ibr 2 1 1 4 Pd 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 i 1 1 i i Point 2y 2 Point 1x LP1 i Weight sensor signal Point 2x 100 LP2 Zero load Point 1y CP1 gt This curve can represent weight sensor on elevator winch where zero load on the motor occurs when the load in the cabin is not zero AAV49426 04 2014 189 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Weight sensor ass LL Function can be accessed if brake logic control is assigned see page 181 If Weight sensor ass PES is not No nO Movement type bSt page 181 is forced to Hoisting UEr Weight sensor ass PES is not authorized in U F 2pts UF2 or U F 5pts UF5 No nO Function inactive 11 Analog input 12 AI2 Analog input 13 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Network Al AIU 1 Virtual input via communication bus to be configured via Al net channel AIC 1 page EE EVE elTet ET A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION If the equipment switches to forced local mode s
226. eck the size of the resistor and wait for it to cool down Check DB Resistor Power brP and DB Resistor value brU parameters page 263 Brake feedback The brake feedback contact does not match the brake logic control The brake does not stop the motor quickly enough detected by measuring the speed on the Pulse input input Check the feedback circuit and the brake logic control circuit Check the mechanical state of the brake Check the brake linings DB unit sh Circuit Short circuit output from braking unit Braking unit not connected Check the wiring of the braking unit and the resistor Check the braking resistor The monitoring of this fault must be disabled by the Brake res fault Mgt oUb parameter page 263 if there is no resistor or braking unit connected to the drive at and above 55 kW 75 HP for ATV71eeeM3X and at and above 90 KW 120 HP for ATV71eeeNA4 Precharge Charging relay control fault or charging resistor damaged Thyr soft charge DC bus charging fault thyristors Turn the drive off and then back on again Check the internal connections Inspect repair the drive Differential curent Fault Current difference between power block A and B ATV71ECO60 M14N4 or ATVEM15 M24Y only Check thyristor with TEST THYRISTORS Check IGBT with TRANSISTOR TEST Check current transformer Encoder coupling Break in encoder s mechanical coupli
227. ed CUS Auto tuning has been performed but at least one parameter set by this auto tuning operation has subsequently been modified The Auto tuning tUn parameter then returns to No nO The following auto tuning parameters are affected Cust stator resist rSA Idw IdA Lfw LFA and Cust rotor t const tr page 82 for asynchronous motors Cust stator R syn rSAS page 85 for synchronous motors 151 Tune type Define the motor parameters that will be measured during auto tuning operation This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 Sync mot SYn or Sync CL FSY up to 45 kW 60 HP for ATV71eeeM3X and 75 kW 100 HP for ATV71eeeN4 rS rS Only cold stator resistance is measured during the auto tuning operation ALL ALL Cold stator resistance d and q axis stator self inductance are measured during the auto tuning operation 94 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Speed loop type Standard Std Selection of speed loop type Standard Std Standard speed loop High perfor HPF High performance speed loop We advise to deactivate Dec ramp adapt brA No nO see page 161 Speed prop gain 1 0 to 100096 4096 This parameter can be accessed if Speed loop type SSL Standard Std Speed loop proportional gain 1 t
228. ed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 64 AAV49426 04 2014 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Preset speed 2 0 to 599 Hz UTE See page 169 Preset speed 2 Preset speed 3 0 to 599 Hz See page 169 Preset speed 3 Preset speed 4 0 to 599 Hz See page 169 Preset speed 4 Preset speed 5 0 to 599 Hz See page 169 Preset speed 5 Preset speed 6 0 to 599 Hz See page 169 Preset speed 6 Preset speed 7 0 to 599 Hz See page 169 Preset speed 7 Preset speed 8 0 to 599 Hz See page 169 Preset speed 8 Preset speed 9 0 to 599 Hz See page 169 Preset speed 9 Preset speed 10 0 to 599 Hz See page 169 Preset speed 10 Preset speed 11 0 to 599 Hz See page 169 Preset speed 11 Preset speed 12 0 to 599 Hz See page 169 Preset speed 12 Preset speed 13 0 to 599 Hz See page 169 Preset speed 13 0 to 599 Hz Preset speed 14 See page 169 Preset speed 14 These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming
229. edure This procedure applies to all types of encoder 1 2 Configure the parameters of the encoder used pages 120 to 123 Set Motor control type Ctt to a value other than FVC and Sync CL FSY even if it is the required configuration For example use SVC V UUC for an asynchronous motor and Sync mot SYn for a synchronous motor Configure the motor parameters in accordance with the specifications on the rating plate Asynchronous motor see page 78 Rated motor power nPr Rated motor volt UnS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor freq FrS Rated motor speed nSP Synchronous motor see page 87 Nominal sync nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS Syn EMF constant PHS Autotune L d axis 195 IAutotune L q axis LqS Cust stator R syn rSAS Current Limitation CLI must not exceed the maximum motor current otherwise demagnetization may occur Set Encoder usage No nO Perform auto tuning Set Encoder check EnC Yes YES Check that the rotation of the motor is safe Setthe motor rotating at stabilized speed 15 of the rated speed for at least 3 seconds and use the 1 2 MONITORING SUP menu to monitor its behavior If it trips on an Encoder fault EnF Encoder check EnC returns to No nO Check the parameter settings and perform auto tuning again see steps 1 to 5 above Check that t
230. ee page 269 the virtual input remains fixed at the last value transmitted Do not use the virtual input and forced local mode in the same configuration Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury J Point 1 X 0 to 99 99 0 to 99 99 of signal on assigned input Point 1x LP1 must be less than Point 2x LP2 The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES is assigned LI Point 1Y 1 36 to 1 36 In 1 Current corresponding to load Point 1 X LP1 in A The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES is assigned Point 2X 0 01 to 10096 0 01 to 100 of signal on assigned input Point 2x LP2 must be greater than Point 1x LP1 The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES is assigned LI Point 2Y 1 36 to 1 36 In 1 Current corresponding to load Point 2x LP2 in A The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES is assigned Ibr 4 20 mA loss 0 to 1 36 In 1 Brake release current in the event of the loss of the weight sensor information This parameter can be accessed if the weight sensor is assigned to an analog current input and the 4 20 mA loss fault is deactivated Recommended settings Ofor elevators Rated motor current for a hoisting application 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on t
231. een different sets Example The highest Low speed LSP must be below the lowest High speed HSP AAV49426 04 2014 223 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Motor or configuration switching MULTIMOTORS CONFIG The drive may contain up to 3 configurations which can be saved using the 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu page 274 Each of these configurations can be activated remotely enabling adaptation to 20r 3 different motors or mechanisms multimotor mode 20r 3 different configurations for a single motor multiconfiguration mode The two switching modes cannot be combined Note The following conditions MUST be observed Switching may only take place when stopped drive locked If a switching request is sent during operation it will not be executed until the next stop In the event of motor switching the following additional conditions apply When the motors are switched the power and control terminals concerned must also be switched as appropriate The maximum power of the drive must not be exceeded by any of the motors All the configurations to be switched must be set and saved in advance in the same hardware configuration this being the definitive configuration option and communication cards Failure to follow this instruction can cause the drive to lock on an Incorrect config CFF fault Menu and parameters switched in multimotor mode 1 3 SETTINGS SEt 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC
232. eference FPI 11 Analog input 12 AI2 Analog input 13 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Al4 AI4 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted Setting up the PID regulator 1 Configuration in PID mode See the diagram on page 196 2 Perform a test in factory settings mode in most cases this will be sufficient To optimize the drive adjust rPG or rlG gradually and independently and observe the effect on the PID feedback in relation to the reference 3 If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect Perform a test with a speed reference in Manual mode without PID regulator and with the drive on load for the speed range of the system In steady state the speed must be stable and comply with the reference and the PID feedback signal must be stable In transient state the speed must follow the ramp and stabilize quickly and the PID feedback must follow the speed If this is not the case see the settings for the drive and or sensor signal and wiring Switch to PID mode Set brA
233. egrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted 100 of the reference corresponds to 300 of the rated torque o El E E El Ej Torque ref sign No nO Function inactive O L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the torque sign is the same as the reference If the assigned input or bit is at 1 the torque sign is the opposite of the reference 0 to 1000 Torque ratio Coefficient applied to Torque reference tr1 Torque ramp time 0 to 99 99 s Rise and fall time for a variation of 100 of the rated torque Torque control stop Pspeee Spa Speed SPd Speed regulation stop in accordance with the type of stop configuration see page 162 Freewheel YES Freewheel stop O Spin SPn Zero torque stop but maintaining the flux in the motor This type of operation is only possible if Motor control type Ctt lt FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY Spin time 0 to 3600 s The parameter can be accessed if Torque control stop tSt Spin SPn Spin time following stop in order to remain ready to restart quickly Parameter
234. elect the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the lt lt gt gt F2 and F3 keys and rotating the navigation button Format word 4 Format of word 4 O Hex Hexadecimal Signed Decimal with sign L1 Unsigned Decimal without sign It will then be possible to view the selected words in the COMMUNICATION MAP submenu of the 1 2 MONITORING menu Example Term 35 00Hz 80 COMMUNICATION MAP F230 Hex 286 AAV49426 04 2014 7 DISPLAY CONFIG This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal It can be used to customize parameters or a menu and to access parameters Term 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 6 MONITORING CONFIG ENT 7 DISPLAY CONFIG 7 1 USER PARAMETERS Customization of 1 to 15 parameters 7 2 USER MENU Creation of a customized menu 7 3 PARAMETER ACCESS Customization of the visibility and protection mechanisms of menus and parameters 7 4 KEYPAD PARAMETERS Adjustment of the contrast and stand by mode of the graphic display terminal parameters stored in the terminal rather than in the drive Choice of the menu displayed on power up AAV49426 04 2014 287 7 DISPLAY CONFIG If Return std name 7 Yes the display reverts to standard but the custom settings remain stored RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A PARAMETER SELECTION PARAMETER SELECTION
235. ent range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 2 4 preset PID ref 1 900 The parameter be accessed if Preset ref PID 4 Pr4 is assigned Adjustment range from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 2 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 If a graphic display terminal is not in use values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped a period mark after the 204 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Torque regulation Speed reference Speed Speed control Torque curent Torque gt limitation reference Torque 7 M Torque ref sign Torque ratio Torque ramp time tSd trt trP T b LI LI The function can be used to switch between operation in speed regulation mode and operation in torque control mode In torque control mode the speed may vary within a configurable deadband When it reaches a lower or upper limit the drive automatically reverts to speed regulation mode fallback and remains at this limit speed The regulated torque is therefore no longer maintained and two scenarios may occur torque returns to the required value the drive will return t
236. er on time IGBT alarm counter PID reference PID feedback PID error PID Output 021 to 552505 Config active Utilised param set in Hz parameter displayed in factory configuration as a in Hz in A parameter displayed in factory configuration in Hz in rpm in V in W as a in V as a as a as a 96 in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating in hours length of time the motor has been switched on in hours length of time the drive has been switched on in seconds total time of IGBT overheating alarms as a as a 96 as a in Hz Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted CNFO 1 or 2 see page 224 SET1 2 or 3 see page 223 Select the parameter using ENT a then appears next to the parameter Parameter s can also be deselected using ENT 1 or 2 parameters can be selected Example PARAM BAR SELECT MONITORING 284 AAV49426 04 2014 16 MONITORING CONFIG Name Description Display value type O Digital Display of one or two digital values on the screen factory configuration Bar graph Display of one or two bar graphs on the screen List Display a list of between one and five values on the screen PARAMETER SELECTION Alarm groups Freque
237. erence division 4 1 2 1 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 gt 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Initial response Reference division 4 1 2 1 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Expert parameters Increase in StA 47 Reference division 4 1 2 4 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Increase in FLG 4 Reference division 12 1 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 E Time in ms Increase in StA WV Reference division 12 1 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 gt 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Increase in FLG Reference division 1 2 1 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time ms Two parameters from the 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu are accessible at Expert level and can be used to boost dynamics if necessary See page 96 60 AAV49426 04 2014 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LPE ENA prop gain 1 to 9999 250 See page 100 ea m ENA integral gain 0 to 9999 See page 100 IR compensation See page 101 a Slip compensation 0 to 300 See page 81 Ramp divider See page 162 g DC inject level 1 0 1 to 1 41 In 1 0 64 In 1 See page 163 L
238. erm 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A RETURN TO MAIN MENU DIRECT ACCESS TO 10 LAST MODIFICATIONS GOTO MULTIPOINT SCREEN MAIN MENU gt 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS ENT DIRECT ACCESS TO Opens the direct access window which See page 292 will contain the text 1 The function keys lt lt and gt gt F2 and F3 can be used to select each of the numbers and the navigation button to increment or decrement the numbers 1 3 in the example below Term 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A DIRECT ACCESS TO 1 3 SETTINGS ENT Ramp increment 01 1 3 Acceleration Deceleration SETTINGS Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 10 LAST MODIFICATIONS Opens a window in which the last 10 parameters modified can be accessed directly RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 10 LAST MODIFICATIONS Rated mot current Acceleration 10s p JENA prop gain 1 2 Rated mot current 15A 15 0 A Preset speed 4 20 Hz Preset speed 5 30 Hz 26 AAV49426 04 2014 Graphic display terminal MAIN MENU Menu mapping RDY Term 0 00 2 0A MAIN MENU RDY Term 0 00Hz 1 DRIVE MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 1 SIMPLY START 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 6 MONITORING CONFIG 7 DISPLAY CONFIG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 1
239. erm 50 00Hz OA THYRISTORS RESULT istor 1 Failed istor 2 OK istor 3 OK istor 4 1 OK istor 5 1 OK istor 6 1 OK Thyristor 12 1 OK RDY Term 50 00Hz RDY Term 50 00Hz TRANSISTOR TEST ENT TEST INPROGRESS Check that a motor is connected 2s Enter the motor nameplate data ENT to perform the test ESC to cancel RDY Term 50 00Hz OA TRANSISTOR RESULT The result for each IGBT is displayed OK on 2 lines The first line shows whether or not it OK has short circuited The second line shows whether or not itis open IGBT3 OK IGBT 4 OK IGBT 4 OK IGBT 5 OK IGBT 5 OK IGBT 6 short circuit IGBT 6 OK IGBT 1B 1 OK IGBT 1B 1 Open IGBT 2B 1 OK IGBT 2B 1 OK IGBT 6B 1 short circuit IGBT 6B 1 OK Note To start the tests press and hold down 2 s the ENT key 1 Test results for Thyristor 4 12 and IGBT 1B 6B are olny accessible for ATV71EC90N4 to M14N4 and ATV71EM15Y to M24Y 272 AAV49426 04 2014 1 11 IDENTIFICATION RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU ENT L 71 15 4 1 14 PROGRAMMAB
240. erse speed Motor frequency Ec LR ERI 0 h H i LSP Forward 279 press 179 press 0 Reverse 219 press 179 press 0 Do not use this type with 3 wire control Whichever type of operation is selected the max speed is set by High speed HSP see page 57 Note If the reference is switched via rFC see page 147 from any one reference channel to another reference channel with speed the value of reference rFr after ramp may be copied at the same time in accordance with the Copy channel 1 gt 2 COP parameter see page 148 If the reference is switched via rFC see page 147 from one reference channel to any other reference channel with speed the value of reference rFr after ramp is always copied at the same time This prevents the speed being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place 170 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting speed assignment No nO Function inactive L11 LI1 to LI6 LI6 LI7 LI7 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO C201 C201 to C215 C215 With integrated CANopen in I O profile IO C301 C3
241. eturn No nO and the procedure will have to be repeated Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury L1 No nO Auto tuning not performed O Yes YES Auto tuning is performed as soon as possible then the parameter automatically changes to Done dOnE O Done dOnE Use of the values given the last time auto tuning was performed Note Auto tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated If a freewheel stop or fast stop function has been assigned to a logic input this input must be set to 1 active at 0 Auto tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands which will be taken into account after the auto tuning sequence e If auto tuning fails the drive displays No nO and depending on the configuration of Autotune fault mgt tnL page 263 may switch to Auto tuning tnF fault mode Auto tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds Do not interrupt the process Wait for the display to change to Done dOnE or No nO Auto tuning status Not done tAb for information only cannot be modified L1 Not done tAb The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor O Pending PEnd Auto tuning has been requested but not yet performed O In Progress PrOG Auto tuning in progress Failed FAIL Auto tuning has failed O Done dOnE The stator resistance measured by the auto tuning function is used to control
242. evel of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage T DC injection time 1 0 1 to 30s See page 163 Maximum current injection time DC inject level 1 IdC After this time the injection current becomes DC inject level 2 IdC2 DC inject level 2 EIE MEA 163 Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode once period of time DC injection time 1 tdl has elapsed CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current without overheating Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage DC injection time 2 0 1 to 30s See page 163 Maximum injection time DC inject level 2 IdC2 for injection selected as stop mode only Dis operat opt code Ramp stop rMp Disable operation stop mode Freewheel nSt the drive stops in freewheel when going from Operation enable to Switched on state Ramp stop rMp the drive stops on ramp when going from Operation enable to Switched on state 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When
243. f 1B channel Fr1b Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above Subtract ref 3 No nO Selection of a reference to be subtracted from Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Fr1b Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above Multiplier ref 2 No nO Selection of a multiplier reference Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Fr1b Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above Multiplier ref 3 Selection of a multiplier reference Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Fr1b Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above AAV49426 04 2014 157 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Ramp type Linear LIn S ramp S U ramp U Customized CUS S ramps f Hz FrS The rounding coefficient is fixed where t2 0 6 x t1 and t1 set ramp time ey ia The rounding coefficient is fixed where 12 0 5 x t1 and t1 set ramp time Customized ramps f Hz f Hz FrS FrS tA1 adjustable from 0 to 100 tA2 adjustable from 0 to 100 tA1 adjustable from 0 to 100 tA4 adjustable from 0 to 100 0 0 TR Asa 96 of t1 where t1 7 set ramp time ti Adjustment range Factory setting Linear Lin Ramp increment 1 0 01 Ra
244. f the motor frequency Trip time in seconds 1Hz 3Hz 5Hz 10Hz 20 Hz 50 Hz 10 000 1 000 100 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 1 1 12 13 1 4 1 5 1 6 Motor current ItH AAV49426 04 2014 247 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Motor protect type No nO No protection Self cooled ACL For self cooled motors Force cool FCL For force cooled motors Note A fault trip will occur when the thermal state reaches 1180 of the rated state and reactivation will occur when the state falls back below 100 Motor therm level 1 100 Trip threshold for motor thermal alarm logic output or relay Motor2 therm level 0 to 118 Trip threshold for motor 2 thermal alarm logic output or relay Motor3 therm level 0 to 118 Trip threshold for motor 3 thermal alarm logic output or relay Overload fault mgt Freewheel YES Type of stop in the event of a motor thermal fault Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 162 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel
245. fferent key has been assigned to speed Preset spd2 Press the key to run the drive at the 279 preset speed Preset speed 2 SP2 page 169 Press STOP to stop the Preset spd3 Press the key to run the drive at the preset speed Preset speed 3 SP3 page 169 Press STOP to stop the speed Faster only operates if Ref 2 channel Fr2 lt HMI LCC Press the key to run the drive and increase the speed Identical to F1 key assignment F3 key assignment Identical to F1 key assignment F4 key assignment Identical to F1 key assignment HMI cmd Stop When the T K function is assigned to a key and that function is active this parameter defines the behavior at the moment when control returns to the graphic display terminal O Stop Stops the drive although the controlled direction of operation and reference of the previous channel are copied to be taken into account on the next RUN command Bumpless Does not stop the drive the controlled direction of operation and the reference of the previous channel are copied AAV49426 04 2014 149 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn With graphic display terminal RDY Term 0 00 2 0A MAIN MENU ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS 6 MONITORING CONFIG 7 DISPLAY CONFIG With integrated display terminal Power up Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY STA
246. figuration CFG press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s Check that the selected macro configuration is compatible with the wiring diagram used Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury Customized macro Read only parameter only visible if at least one macro configuration parameter has been modified O Yes YES 42 AAV49426 04 2014 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Standard mot freq 50Hz 50 50Hz IEC 50 IEC 60Hz NEMA 60 NEMA This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters Rated motor volt UnS below High speed HSP page 45 Freq threshold Ftd page 70 Rated motor freq FrS and Max frequency tFr Input phase 1055 to orive O Ignore nO Fault ignored to be used when the drive is supplied via a single phase supply or by the DC bus Freewheel YES Fault with freewheel stop If one phase disappears the drive switches to fault mode Input phase loss IPL but if 2 or 3 phases disappear the drive continues to operate until it trips on an undervoltage fault This parameter is only accessible in this menu on ATV71H037M3 to HU75M3 drives used with a single phase supply gO Rated motor power oe to drive Ene to drive Rated motor power given on the nameplate in kW if Standard mot freq bFr 50Hz IEC 50 in HP if St
247. figuration to a file 274 AAV49426 04 2014 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS RUN Term 12504 50 00 2 RUN _ Term _ 12504 50 00 2 Selection of source configuration 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS Config Source MIZ FACTORY SETTINGS ENT Config source Macro Conf vA PARAMETER GROUP LIST 1 Goto FACTORY SETTINGS Save config RUN Term 1250A 50 00 2 Selection of the menus to be ENT PARAMETER GROUP LIST replaced gt EX Drive menu Note In factory configuration and after a return to factory Motor param s settings PARAMETER GROUP LIST will be empty Settings RUN Term 1250A 50 00Hz Command to return to factory Goto FACTORY SETTINGS settings ENT PLEASE CHECK THAT THE DRIVE WIRING IS OK ESC abort ENT validate RUN Term _ 12504 50 00Hz Goto FACTORY SETTINGS This window appears if no group of parameters is selected First select the parameter group s Press ENT or ESC to continue RUN Term 1250A 50 00 2 Save config AAV49426 04 2014 275 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS Config Source Choice of source configuration L1 Macro Conf Inl Factory configuration return to selected macro configuration Config 1 CFG1 Config 2 CFG2 If the configuration switching function is configured it will not be possible to access Config 1 CFG1 and Config 2
248. figurations control via the communication bus is performed in accordance with the DRIVECOM standard with only 5 freely assignable bits see Communication Parameters Manual The application functions cannot be accessed via the communication interface I O profile IO The command and the reference can come from different channels This configuration both simplifies and extends use via the communication interface Commands may be sent via the logic inputs on the terminals or via the communication bus When commands are sent via a bus they are available on a word which acts as virtual terminals containing only logic inputs Application functions can be assigned to the bits in this word More than one function can be assigned to the same bit Note Stop commands from the terminals remain active even if the terminals are not the active command channel Note The integrated Modbus channel has 2 physical communication ports The Modbus network port The Modbus HMI port The drive does not differentiate between these two ports but recognizes the graphic display terminal irrespective of the port to which it is connected 138 AAV49426 04 2014 1 6 COMMAND CtL Reference channel for Not separ SIM Separate SEP and I O profile IO configurations PID not configured Ref 1B
249. g input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted RV Inhibition L1 No nO O Yes YES Inhibition of movement in reverse direction does not apply to direction requests sent by logic inputs Reverse direction requests sent by logic inputs are taken into account Reverse direction requests sent by the graphic display terminal are not taken into account Reverse direction requests sent by the line are not taken into account Any reverse speed reference originating from the PID summing input etc will stop the motor Yes YES Stop Key priority No nO O Yes YES Gives priority to the STOP key on the graphic display terminal when the graphic display terminal is not enabled as the command channel Press and hold down ENT for 2 seconds in order for any change in the assignment of Stop Key priority PSt to be taken into account This will be a freewheel stop If the active command channel is the graphic display terminal the stop will be
250. gurations Hoisting and lift Lift Movement type bSt Hoisting UEr page 181 Brake contact No nO page 181 Brake impulse bIP No nO page 181 Brake release FW Ibr Rated mot current nCr page 182 Brake Release time brt lt 0 5 s page 182 Brake release freq blr Auto AUtO page 182 Brake engage freq bEn Auto AUto page 182 Brake engage time 0 5 s page 182 Engage at reversal No nO page 183 Jump at reversal JdC Auto AUtO page 183 Time to restart ttr lt 0 s page183 Current ramp time brr 0 s page 185 Low speed LSP lt Rated motor slip calculated by the drive page 45 Output Phase Loss OPL page 249 Yes YES but it is forced to No nO if Motor control type Ctt page 72 Sync mot SYn No further modifications can be made to this parameter Catch on the fly FLr No nO page 246 No further modifications can be made to this parameter Feed forward FFP 0 page 97 Mast slave Motor control type Ctt lt SVC I CUC page 72 Note These assignments are forced every time the macro configuration changes except for Motor control type Ctt for the Mast slave macro configuration if it is configured in FVC FUC Return to factory settings Returning to factory settings with Config Source FCSI Macro Conf Inl page 276 will return the drive to the selected macr
251. hanged after auto tuning has been performed Auto tuning tUn will return No nO and the procedure will have to be repeated Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury No nO Auto tuning not performed O Yes YES Auto tuning is performed as soon as possible then the parameter automatically changes to Done dOnE O Done dOnE Use of the values given the last time auto tuning was performed Note Auto tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated If a freewheel stop or fast stop function has been assigned to a logic input this input must be inactive Auto tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands which will be taken into account after the auto tuning sequence If auto tuning fails the drive displays No nO and depending on the configuration of Autotune fault mgt tnL page 263 may switch to Auto tuning tnF fault mode Auto tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds Do not interrupt the process Wait for the display to change to Done dOnE or nO LI UO 0 to 800 or 1000 V according to rating VIF profile setting This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 0 to 800 or 1000 V according to rating VIF profile setting This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt V F 5pts UF5 0 to 599 Hz VIF profile setting This p
252. has been inserted Speed input 1 1 to 100 Multiplying coefficient for predictive speed input The parameter cannot be accessed if Speed ref assign No nO on Auto Manual assign L1 No nO The PID is always active O L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 the PID is active If the assigned input or bit is at 1 manual operation is active Acceleration 2 1 0 01 to 6000 s 3 5 0s Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven Ramp AC2 is only active when the PID function starts up and during PID wake ups No nO Manual reference Manual speed input The parameter can be accessed if Auto Manual assign PAU is not No nO No nO Not assigned function inactive 11 Analog input 12 2 Analog input 13 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted The preset speeds are active on the manual reference if they have been configured Et s Fed Foe Fe 1 The parameter can also be
253. hat the motor will withstand this current particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous motors which are susceptible to demagnetization Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage J I Limit 2 value 0 to 1 65 In 1 1 5 In 1 See page 211 The adjustment range is limited to 1 36 In if Switching freq SFr page 63 is less than 2 kHz Note If the setting is less than 0 25 In the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss fault mode if this has been enabled see page 249 If itis less than the no load motor current the limitation no longer has any effect CAUTION Check that the motor will withstand this current particularly in the case of permanent magnet synchronous motors which are susceptible to demagnetization Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming AAV49426 04 2014 63 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Motor fluxing No FnO Fors FIRE Low
254. have optimal behavior See page 84 Start the motor at minimal stable frequency available on the machine without load Check and note the error EMF sync rdAE value See page 87 If the error EMF sync rdAE value is lower to 0 then Syn EMF constant PHS can be increased If the error EMF sync rdAE value is upper to 0 then Syn EMF constant PHS can be reduced 96 error EMF sync rdAE value should be closed to 096 Stop the motor for modify Syn EMF constant PHS in accordance with the value of the error EMF sync rdAE previously noted AAV49426 04 2014 83 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting g Nominal sync 0 25 to 1 5 In 1 to drive rating Rated synchronous motor current given on the nameplate g Nom motor spdsync 0 to 60000 rpm Acc to drive rating Rated synchronous motor speed given on the nameplate On the integrated display unit 0 to 9999 rpm then 10 00 to 60 00 krpm Pole pairs Acc to drive rating Number of pairs of poles on the synchronous motor 1 to 65 535 Nm Acc to drive rating Motor torque Rated motor toque given on the nameplate Increment EMF 0 1mV rpm 0 1 Increment for the Syn EMF constant PHS parameter 0 1mV rpm 0 1 0 7 mV per rpm 1 mV rpm 1 mV per rpm g Syn EMF constant 0 to 65535 Acc to drive rating Synchronous motor
255. he bit changes to 1and after the detection of the following Top Z If the input returns to state 0 and the run command is still active the motor will only restart if 2 3 wire control page 108 2 wire 2C and the 2 wire type Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO If not a new run command must be sent 238 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Active Front End connection This function is not accessible for ATV71HeeeS6X gt and for ATV71HeeeY gt 110 kW 150 HP HHP range Direct power supply via Active Front End AFE reduces the mains current harmonics to less than 496 and gives enables the drive to feedback the generative energy to the mains supply Example circuit using one AFE for one ATV71 lt Semiconductor fuses e E c r 4 111 1L2 1L3 i LFM 211 212 213 AFE Active Front LFC LFM Line Filter Module LFC Line Filter Choke 3L1 3L2 513 AIC Active Infeed Converter i AIC PA PC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Regen Connection nO Not assigned Yes YES Function always active LI1 to LI6 06 LI7 Li7 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic card has been inserted 011 Li11 to L114 1114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted C101 C101 to C115 C115 With integrated Modbus in I O profile IO
256. he drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 190 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn High speed hoisting This function can be used to optimize the cycle times for hoisting movements for zero or lightweight loads It authorizes operation at constant power in order to reach a speed greater than the rated speed without exceeding the rated motor current The speed remains limited by the High speed HSP parameter page 57 The function acts on the speed reference pedestal and not on the reference itself Principle Frequency 4 High speed HSP Ascending Rated motor frequency FrS Torque 0 max Tr Rated Torque motor torque Rated motor frequency FrS High speed HSP CAUTION For permanent magnet synchronous motors the maximum permissible speed must not be exceeded otherwise demagnetization may occur The maximum speed permitted by the motor drive chain or application must not be exceeded at any time Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage AAV49426 04 2014 191 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn There are 2 possible operating modes Speed reference mode The maximum permissible speed is calculated by the drive during a speed step that is set so that the drive can measure the load Current limitation mode The maximum permissible speed is the speed that supports cur
257. he inertia being driven 0 01 to 6000 s 1 5 0s Acceleration 2 See page 160 Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven gJ Deceleration 2 0 01 to 6000 s 1 5 05 See page 160 Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq FrS to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven Begin Acc round 1008 159 Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a of the Acceleration ACC or Acceleration 2 2 ramp time End Acc round 1096 See page 159 Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a 96 of the Acceleration ACC or Acceleration 2 AC2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 100 Begin Acc round tA1 0 to 100 10 Begin Dec round See page 159 Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a of the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 dE2 ramp time 1 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 56 AAV49426 04 2014 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description
258. he mechanical and electrical operation of the encoder its power supply and connections are all OK Reverse the direction of rotation of the motor Dutput Ph rotation PHr parameter page 73 or the encoder signals 10 Repeat the operations from step 6 onwards until Encoder check EnC changes to Done dOnE 11 If necessary change Motor control type Ctt to FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY In the case of Sync CL FSY go on to perform the Procedure for measuring the phase shift angle between the motor and the encoder page 88 76 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Encoder check Not done nO Check encoder feedback See procedure on previous page This parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted 1 Not done nO Check not performed Yes YES Activates monitoring of the encoder L1 Done dOnE Check performed successfully The check procedure checks The direction of rotation of the encoder motor The presence of signals wiring continuity The number of pulses revolution If a fault is detected the drive locks in Encoder fault EnF fault mode Encoder usage This parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted 1 No nO Function inactive Fdbk monit SEC The encoder provides speed feedback for monitoring only Spd fdk reg rEG The encoder provides spee
259. he power section P24 and OV terminals whenever an option card is added or replaced only the power section must be supplied with power next time the drive is powered up By default the new card would not be recognized and it would be impossible to configure it thereby causing the drive to lock in fault mode Power switching via line contactor CAUTION Avoid operating the contactor frequently premature ageing of the filter capacitors Cycle times 60 s may result in damage to the pre charge resistor Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage User adjustment and extension of functions The display unit and buttons can be used to modify the settings and to extend the functions described in the following pages Return to factory settings is made easy by the 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS FCS menu see page 274 There are three types of parameter Display Values displayed by the drive Adjustment Can be changed during operation or when stopped Configuration Can only be modified when stopped and no braking is taking place Can be displayed during operation A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that changes made to the settings during operation do not present any danger We recommend stopping the drive before making any changes Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury AAV49426 04 2014 17 Setup Preliminary recommendat
260. hms Brake res fault Mgt VES Management of short circuit DB unit sh circuit and overheating Internal th sensor InFb faults in the braking unit Ignore nO Fault ignored Configuration to be used if there is no resistor or braking unit connected to the drive O Freewheel YES freewheel stop Autotune fault mgt Freewheel YES O Ignore nO Fault ignored O Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 263 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Card pairing Function can only be accessed in Expert mode This function is used to detect whenever a card has been replaced or the software has been modified in any way When a pairing password is entered the parameters of the cards currently inserted are stored On every subsequent power up these parameters are verified and in the event of a discrepancy the drive locks in HCF fault mode Before the drive can be restarted you must revert to the original situation or re enter the pairing password The following parameters are verified The type of card for all cards The software version for the two control cards the VW3A3202 extension card the Controller Inside card and the communication cards The serial number for the two control cards Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Pairing password OFF to 9999 OFF
261. igit 7 segment display 8 Value of parameter on graphic display terminal Note The text in square brackets indicates what you will see on the graphic display terminal The factory settings correspond to Macro configuration CFG lt Start Stop StS This is the macro configuration set at the factory AAV49426 04 2014 35 Interdependence of parameter values The configuration of certain parameters modifies the adjustment range of other parameters in order to reduce the risk of errors This may result in the modification of a factory setting or a value you have already selected Example 1 Current Limitation CLI page 63 set to 1 6 In or left at its factory setting 1 5 In 2 Switching freq SFr page 63 set to 1 kHz and confirmed with ENT restricts Current Limitation CLI to 1 36 In 3 If Switching freq SFr is increased to 4 kHz Current limitation CLI is no longer restricted but remains at 1 36 In If you require 1 6 In you must reset Current Limitation CLI 36 AAV49426 04 2014 Finding a parameter in this document The following assistance with finding explanations on a parameter is provided With the integrated display terminal Direct use of the parameter code index page 304 to find the page giving details of the displayed parameter With the graphic display terminal Select the required parameter and press F1 Code The parameter code is displayed instead of it
262. inary code O Gray code GrAY Gray code Clock frequency 500 kHz 500 The parameter can be accessed if ACCESS LEVEL Expert and if Encoder protocol UECP SSI SSI or if Encoder protocol UECP lt EnDat 2 1 End Clock frequency for encoder Endat and encoder SSI 160 kHz 160 200 kHz 200 300 kHz 300 400 kHz 400 500 kHz 500 600 kHz 600 700 kHz 700 800 kHz 800 E encoder board is upper or equal to V1 21E01 Auto AUtO This value appears only if Encoder protocol UECP lt SSI SSI and if the version of this Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Encoder filter activ Activation of encoder feedback filter No no Filter deactivated Yes YES Filter activated Encoder filter value 0 to 50 ms Acc to encoder type This parameter can be accessed if Encoder filter activ FFA 7 Yes YES Encoder feedback filter time constant in milliseconds This parameter can be modified during operation AAV49426 04 2014 123 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting R1 Assignment No drive flt FLt sd El o Ej Al E El E Ej E No nO Not
263. ing palletizers depalletizers conveyors roller tables Packing carton packers labeling machines Textiles weaving looms carding frames washing machines spinners drawing frames Wood automatic lathes saws milling High inertia centrifuges mixers unbalanced machines beam pumps presses Process Each machine has its own special features and the combinations listed here are neither mandatory nor exhaustive Some functions are designed specifically for a particular application In this case the application is identified by a tab in the margin on the relevant programming pages Motor control functions ratio Sensorless flux vector control 72 m Flux vector control with sensor 72 B 2 point vector control 72 igi Open loop synchronous motor 73 E Closed loop synchronous motor 73 Output frequency of up to 599 Hz 78 El Motor overvoltage limiting 102 B DC bus connection see User s Manual Motor fluxing using a logic input 91 Switching frequency of up to 16 kHz 74 B Auto tuning 93 B AAV49426 04 2014 Application functions Functions on speed references Differential bipolar reference 110 Reference delinearization magnifying glass effect 112 Frequency control input 146 Reference switching 147 156 Reference summing 155 E Reference subtraction 155
264. ion must not be exceeded at any time Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage E Unt Tune Type Define the motor parameters that will be measured during auto tuning operation This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 7 Sync mot SYn or Sync CL FSY up to 45 kW 60 HP for ATV71eeeM3X and 75 kW 100 HP for ATV71eeeN4 rS rS Only cold stator resistance is measured during the auto tuning operation ALL ALL Cold stator resistance d and q axis stator self inductance are measured during the auto tuning operation 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate AAV49426 04 2014 45 1 2 MONITORING SUP With graphic display terminal RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU MAIN MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 DRIVE MENU 1 2 MONITORING MAP 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Code lt lt gt gt Quick With integrated display terminal Power up Displays the state of the drive 46 AAV49426 04 2014 1 2 MONITORING SUP With graphic display terminal This menu can be used to display the inputs outputs the drive internal states and values and the communication data and values RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 VO MAP PROG CARD I O of the Controller In
265. ion Adjustment range Factory setting Vector Control 2pt No nO Function inactive Yes YES Function active Used in applications in which the motor rated speed and frequency need to be exceeded in order to optimize operation at constant power or when the maximum voltage of the motor needs to be limited to a value below the line voltage The voltage frequency profile must then be adapted in accordance with the motor s capabilities to operate at maximum voltage UCP and maximum frequency FCP Motor voltage Max voltage UCP 1 Rated motor volt UnS 4 Frequency Rated motor freq FrS Freq Const Power FCP According to drive According to drive rating rating and Standard mot freq bFr V constant power This parameter can be accessed if Vector Control 2pt UC2 Yes YES According to drive Standard mot freq rating and Rated bFr motor freq FrS This parameter can be accessed if Vector Control 2pt UC2 Yes YES Freq Const Power Slip compensation 0 190 This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt is not V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 Adjusts the slip compensation around the value set by the rated motor speed The speeds given on motor nameplates are not necessarily exact Ifslip setting lt actual slip The motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state but at a speed lower than the reference
266. ion active to be used on drives connected in parallel via their DC bus Used to balance the braking power between the drives The Braking level Ubr parameter must be set to the same value on the various drives The value Yes YES is possible only if Dec ramp adapt brA lt No nO see page 161 Load sharing No nO When 2 motors are connected mechanically and therefore at the same speed and each is controlled by a drive this function can be used to improve torque distribution between the two motors To do this it varies the speed based on the torque No nO Function inactive Yes YES Function active The parameter can only be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 is not V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 Load correction 1 Rated correction in Hz The parameter can be accessed if Load sharing LbA lt Yes YES Torque Nominal torque 4 1 1 1 1 1 gt Frequency 1 1 1 1 1 Nominal torque 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 104 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Load sharing parameters that can be accessed at expert level Torque reference Reference Ramp Speed loop Speed Balancing Filter K LBC LBF LBC1 LBC2 LBC3 Principle The loa
267. ions Starting Important n factory settings mode the motor can only be supplied with power once the forward reverse and DC injection stop commands have been reset On power up or a manual fault reset or after a stop command If they have not been reset the drive will display nSt but will not start f the automatic restart function has been configured Automatic restart Atr parameter the 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt menu see page 245 these commands are taken into account without a reset being necessary Test on a low power motor or without a motor n factory settings mode Output Phase Loss OPL detection page 249 is active OPL lt YES To check the drive in a test or maintenance environment without having to switch to a motor with the same rating as the drive particularly useful in the case of high power drives deactivate Output Phase Loss OPL lt no Configure Motor control type Ctt V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu see page 72 CAUTION Motor thermal protection will not be provided by the drive if the motor current is less than 0 2 times the rated drive current Provide an alternative means of thermal protection Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage Using motors in parallel Configure Motor control type Ctt V F 2pts UF2 or V F 5pts UF5 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu see page 72
268. ip in Hz or as a 96 calculate the rated speed as follows 100 slip as a 96 100 50 slip in Hz 50 60 slip in Hz 60 Rated speed Synchronous speed x or Rated speed Synchronous speed x or Rated speed Synchronous speed x 50 Hz motors 60 Hz motors 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate 78 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting A DANGER HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR ARC FLASH During auto tuning the motor operates at rated current Do not service the motor during auto tuning Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury A WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL It is essential that the following parameters Rated motor volt UnS Rated motor freq FrS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor speed nSP and Rated motor power nPr are correctly configured before starting auto tuning for asynchronous motor It is essential that the following parameters Nominal sync nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS and Syn EMF constant PHS are correctly configured before starting auto tuning for synchronous motor Autotune L d axis LdS and Autotune L q axis LqS shall be configured if Tune type tUnt is not set to ALL ALL see page 86 When one or more of these parameters have been c
269. is the time required for the mechanical brake to engage AAV49426 04 2014 177 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn 0 attained SdC1 r attained Ib Fluxed motor Bur20 uonoefu Frequency Xn 4 Frequency 4 Reference Flux current Rated flux Torque current Direction of 1 operation Brake logic control horizontal movement in open loop mode or logic Brake contact State of brake 4 Released Engaged Type of motor control Key bEn Brake engage freq bEt Brake engage time brt Brake Release time Ibr Brake release FW SdC1 Auto DC inj level 1 tbE Brake engage delay ttr Time to restart E e AAV49426 04 2014 178 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Fluxed motor 0 attained attained Descending Ascending gt Bur20 uonoefu L Frequency tooo 4 4 Brake logic control vertical movement in open loop mode current m f 1 1 1 1 1 1 lt lt x c o 8 59 90 55 5 96 S 9 c 2
270. istance d and q axis stator self inductance are measured during the auto tuning operation Auto AUtO to 300 Auto AUtO PSI align curr max This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 7 Sync mot SYn or Sync CL FSY Parameter not available at and above 90kW 125HP for ATV71eeeeY and ATV71eeeeN4 and at and above 55kW 75 HP for ATV71eeeeM3X Current level in of Nominal sync nCrS for PSI align PSI and PSIO align PSIO angle shift measurement modes This parameter has an impact on the inductor measurement PSI align curr max MCr is used for tune operation This current must be equal or higher than the maximum current level of the application otherwise instability may occur If PSI align curr max MCr is set to Auto AUtO PSI align curr max MCr 150 of Nominal I sync nCrS during the tune operation and 10096 of Nominal I sync nCrS during angle shift measurement in case of standard alignment PSI align PSI or PSIO align PSIO Note The maximum value of PSI align curr max MCr is limited by Current Limitation CLI 86 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Code Name Description 3276 7 to 3276 7 96 error EMF sync Parameter not available at and above 90kW 125HP for ATV71eeeeY and ATV71eeeeNA and at and above 55kW 75 HP for ATV71eeeeM3X Ratio D Axis Current Use rdAE to a
271. ithout changing the settings Macro configuration Start Stop Motor frequency 50 Hz Constant torque application with asynchronous motor and sensorless flux vector control Normal stop mode on deceleration ramp Stop mode in the event of a fault freewheel Linear acceleration and deceleration ramps 3 seconds Low speed 0 Hz High speed 50 Hz Motor thermal current 7 rated drive current Standstill injection braking current 0 7 x rated drive current for 0 5 seconds No automatic starts after a fault Switching frequency 2 5 kHz or 4 kHz depending on drive rating Logic inputs 111 forward LI2 Forward 2 operating direction 2 wire control on transition L13 114 LI5 LI6 inactive not assigned Analog inputs speed reference 0 10 V AI2 0 20 mA inactive not assigned Relay R1 The contact opens in the event of a fault or drive off Relay R2 Inactive not assigned Analog output AO1 0 20 mA inactive not assigned Option card factory settings The option card inputs outputs are not factory set AAV49426 04 2014 Application functions The tables on the following pages show the most common combinations of functions and applications in order to guide your selection The applications in these tables relate to the following machines in particular Hoisting cranes overhead cranes gantries vertical hoisting translation slewing lifting platforms Elevators elevators in retrofit up to 1 2 m s Handl
272. ithout having to disconnect the drive from the power supply No nO Function inactive Yes YES Reinitialization Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s The parameter changes back to No nO automatically as soon as the operation is complete The drive can only be reinitialized when locked CAUTION Make sure that the cause of the fault that led to the drive locking has been removed before reinitializing Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage 244 AAV49426 04 2014 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Automatic restart No nO Function inactive Yes YES Automatic restart after locking on a fault if the fault has disappeared and the other operating conditions permit the restart The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting periods 1 s 5 s 10 s then 1 minute for the following attempts The drive fault relay remains activated if this function is active The speed reference and the operating direction must be maintained Use 2 wire control 2 3 wire control tCC 2 wire 2C and 2 wire type tCt Level LEL see page 108 A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that an automatic restart will not endanger personnel or equipment in any way Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury
273. ive Replace the braking unit s temperature sensor Inspect repair the braking unit The monitoring of this fault must be disabled by the Brake res fault Mgt bUb parameter page 263 if there is no braking unit connected to the drive Internal time meas Fault on the electronic time measurement component Inspect repair the drive internal CPU Internal microprocessor fault Turn off and reset Inspect repair the drive AAV49426 04 2014 295 Faults Causes Remedies Faults which cannot be reset automatically continued Overcurrent Probable cause Parameters in the SETTINGS SEt and 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menus are not correct Inertia or load too high Mechanical locking Check the parameters Check the size of the motor drive load Check the state of the mechanism Power removal Fault with the drive s Power removal safety function Inspect repair the drive Motor short circuit Impedant sh circuit Ground short circuit Short circuit or grounding at the drive output Significant earth leakage current at the drive output if several motors are connected in parallel Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor and the motor insulation Perform the diagnostic tests via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu Reduce the switching frequency Connect chokes in series with the motor Check the adjustment of speed loop and brake Inc
274. justable ramp Max stop time StM O Lock out LnF Lock freewheel stop without fault UnderV restart tm Let 10 Time delay before authorizing restart after a complete stop for UnderV prevention StP Ramp stop rMP if the voltage has returned to normal Prevention level Undervoltage fault prevention level setting in V which can be accessed if UnderV prevention StP is not No nO The adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the drive voltage rating and the Mains voltage UrES value g Max stop time 0 01 to 60 00 s 1 00 s Ramp time if UnderV prevention StP Ramp stop rMP DC bus maintain tm 110 3939 5 DC bus maintain time if UnderV prevention StP DC Maintain MMS Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 253 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting IGBT test Yes YES No nO No test O Yes YES The IGBTs are tested on power up and every time a run command is sent These tests cause a slight delay a few ms In the event of a fault the drive will lock The following faults can be detected Drive output short circuit terminals U V W SCF display IGBT faulty xtF where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned IGBT short circuited x2F where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned
275. justment range ccs switching ch1 active The parameter can be accessed if Profile CHCF Separate SEP or I O profile IO Erami ch1 active Cd1 Cmd channel 1 Cd1 active no switching ch2 active Cd2 Cmd channel 2 Cd2 active no switching LII LH L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 not to CD14 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 channel channel 1 Cd1 is active If the assigned input or bit is at 1 channel channel 2 Cd2 is active channel 1 Terminals tEr Terminals tEr Terminals HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted The parameter is available if Profile CHCF Separate SEP or I O profile IO channel 2 Modbus Mdb Terminals tEr Terminals HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted The parameter is available if Profile CHCF Separate SEP or I O profile IO Ref 2 switching ch1 active Fr1 ch1 active Fr1 no switching Ref 1
276. justments to be made during operation To eliminate the braking resistor and therefore the increase in the DC bus voltage Display the machine speed on the graphic display terminal Reduce the integral gain value until the machine speed drops When this point is reached increase the integral gain until the machine speed stabilizes Use the graphic display terminal or an oscilloscope to check that the DC bus voltage is stable To save energy Reducing the proportional gain gradually may increase energy savings by reducing the maximum value of the line current but it will increase speed variations and therefore mechanical stress The aim is to identify settings that will enable energy to be saved and minimize mechanical stress When reducing the proportional gain it may be necessary to readjust the integral gain in order to avoid an overvoltage trip Note Once the adjustments are complete check that the pump starts up correctly If the ENA integral gain setting is too low this may lead to insufficient torque on startup Reduction ratio This setting corresponds to the motor speed ahead of gearbox speed after gearbox ratio This parameter is used to display the average speed in Hz and the machine speed in customer units e g in strokes per minute on the graphic display terminal In order to be displayed on the graphic display terminal these values must be selected in the 1 2 MONITORING SUP menu Adjustment recommendations for
277. le cause Controller Inside card fault Please refer to the card documentation Brake control Brake release current not reached Brake engage frequency threshold Brake engage freq bEn only regulated when brake logic control is assigned Check the drive motor connection Check the motor windings Check the Brake release FW Ibr and Brake release Rev Ird settings page 182 Apply the recommended settings for Brake engage freq bEn Com network Communication fault on communication card Check the environment electromagnetic compatibility Check the wiring Check the time out Replace the option card Inspect repair the drive CANopen com Interruption in communication on the CANopen bus Check the communication bus Check the time out Refer to the CANopen User s Manual External flt LI Bit Fault triggered by an external device depending on user Check the device which caused the fault and reset External fault com Fault triggered by a communication network Check for the cause of the fault and reset Out contact open The output contactor remains open although the closing conditions have been met Check the contactor and its wiring Check the feedback circuit input contactor The drive is not turned on even though Mains V time out LCt has elapsed Check the contactor and its wiring Check the time out Check the line contactor d
278. limit by 1x the rated torque or 100 100 6 83 3 new value lower limit range x ASH2 Application example 2 The value of the motor current at the AO2 output is to be transferred with 0 20 mA range 2 In motor In motor being the equivalent of a 0 8 In drive The parameter motor OCr varies between 0 and 2 times the rated drive current or a range of 2 5 times the rated drive current Scaling AO2 min ASL2 must not modify the lower limit which therefore remains at its factory setting of 096 Scaling AO2 max ASH2 must modify the upper limit by 0 5x the rated motor torque or 100 100 5 lt 80 new value lt lower limit range x ASH2 AAV49426 04 2014 131 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting AO1 assignment re ee e Ely Eo e NI s Fr o 3 E o o No nO Not assigned I motor OCr Current in the motor between 0 and 2 In In rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Motor freq OFr Output frequency from 0 to Max frequency tFr Ramp out OrP From 0 to Max frequency tFr Motor torq trq Motor torque between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque Sign torque Stq Signed motor torque between 3 and 3 times the rated motor torque The sign corresponds to the motor mode and the sign to the generator mode braking
279. long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 151 L CANopen fault mgt Freewheel YES Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with integrated CANopen Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 162 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 108 if control is via the terminals fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain
280. losed for released brake No nO Function inactive O LI1 L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 Brake logic filter T 0 to 1000 ms Filter on brake contact logic input The parameter can be accessed if Brake contact is not set to No nO Brake impulse No nO The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES lt No nO see page 190 and if Movement type bSt lt Hoisting UEr L1 No nO The motor torque is given in the required operating direction at current Ibr Yes YES The motor torque is always Forward check that this direction corresponds to ascending at current Ibr 2 IBR 2Ibr The torque is in the required direction at current Ibr for Forward and Ird for Reverse for certain specific applications Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 181 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Brake release FW 1 0 to 1 32 In 2 Brake release current threshold for ascending or forward movement The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES No nO see page 190 0 to 1 32 In 2 0 Brake release Rev 1 Brake release current threshold for ascending or forward movement The parameter can be accessed if Weight sensor ass PES No nO see page 190 010 5 00 5
281. lt 270 AAV49426 04 2014 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS Summary table of types of Encoder Fault 0 No error except if the control section has a separate power supply in which case the power section must be turned on to display the actual code 1 Internal UE MC communication fault CRC fault 2 Internal UE MC communication fault time out 16 Synchronization error PLL error 17 Encoder signal cut or short circuited 18 PUC emulation fault 19 Resolver Unstable feedback signal 20 Internal card communication fault 21 Resolver Feedback signal too weak 22 Resolver Feedback signal too strong 23 Encoder overcurrent 32 EnDAT CRC error 33 EnDAT Start bit not detected 34 EnDAT EEP access error 35 EnDAT Incorrect EEP value 48 Hiperface Incoherent SinCos signal 49 Hiperface Time out 50 Hiperface Unknown encoder 51 Hiperface CRC error 64 SinCos Incoherent SinCos signal 80 551 Parity error 81 SSI Invalid data 96 The position is not available AAV49426 04 2014 271 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS THYRISTORS TEST is only accessible for ATV71eeeM3 gt 18 5 kW and ATV71eeeN4 18 5 kW drives RDY Term 50 00Hz RDY Term 50 00Hz OA RDY Term 50 00Hz OA TEST PROCEDURES ENT THYRISTORS TEST ENT TEST INPROGRESS THYRISTORS TEST TRANSISTOR TEST 2s ENT to perform the test gt 10 RDY T
282. ly be accessed with the graphic display terminal Term 0 00 2 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS Code 4 PASSWORD 5 LANGUAGE Open To download one of the 4 files from the graphic display terminal to the drive SAVE AS To download the current drive configuration to the graphic display terminal Note Download between drive and graphic display terminal and vice versa can be done only when the motor is stopped RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A Term 0 00Hz 0A 0A 3 OPEN SAVE AS ENT See details on a the next page SAVE AS Drive menu Motor parameters Communication Code lt lt gt gt Quick i Code Quick Prog control inside card Note Opening an empty file has no effect ENT RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A DOWNLOAD PLEASE CHECK THAT THE DRIVE WIRING IS OK ESC abort ENT continue ENT Term 0 00Hz 0A SAVE AS RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A DOWNLOAD Used ENT Free IN PROGRESS Saving to a used file 9 deletes and replaces the RDY Term 0 00Hz OA configuration contained in DOWNLOAD this file DONE ENT or ESC to continue Various messages may appear when the download is requested IN PROGRESS DONE Error messages if download not possible Motor parameters are NOT COMPATIBLE Do you want to continue In this case the download is possible but the parameters will be restricted AAV49426 04 2014 279 3 OP
283. mains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true LO4 active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments LO4 holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 128 AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Use of analog output AO1 as a logic output Analog output AO1 can be used as a logic output by assigning DO1 In this case when set to 0 this output corresponds to the AO1 min value 0 V or 0 mA for example and when set to 1 to the AO1 max value 10 V or 20 mA for example The electrical characteristics of this analog output remain unchanged As these differ from logic output characteristics it is important to ensure that they are compatible with the intended application Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting DO1 assignment Identical to R1 see page 124 with the addition
284. mand following motor stop This parameter can be accessed if Output contact fdbk rCA is assigned The time delay must be greater than the opening time of the output contactor If it is set to 0 the fault will not be monitored If the contactor fails to open at the end of the set time the drive will lock in FCF1 fault mode Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 215 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Positioning by sensors or limit switches This function is used for managing positioning using position sensors or limit switches linked to logic inputs or using control word bits Slowing down Stopping The action logic for the inputs and bits can be configured on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 or a falling edge change from 1 to 0 The example below has been configured on a rising edge A Forward run command Reverse run command Slowdown forward Stop FW limit sw Speed Low speed LSP 0 The slowdown mode and stop mode can be configured The operation is identical for both directions of operation Slowdown and stopping operate according to the same logic described below Example Forward slowdown on rising edge Forward slowdown takes place on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the input or bit assigned to forward slowdown if this rising edge occurs in forward operation The slowdown command is then memorized even in the event of
285. minal The communication functions are not described in this manual but in the manual for the bus or network used Communication Parameters Manual This manual describes The drive parameters with specific information for use via a bus or communication network The operating modes specific to communication state chart The interaction between communication and local control Manuals for Modbus CANopen Ethernet Profibus INTERBUS Uni Telway and Modbus Plus etc These manuals describe the assembly connection to the bus or network signaling diagnostics and configuration of the communication specific parameters via the integrated display terminal or the graphic display terminal They also describe the communication services of the protocols AAV49426 04 2014 5 Software enhancements Since the Altivar ATV 71 S383 was first launched it has benefited from the addition of several new functions Software version has now been updated to V6 7 Although this documentation relates to version V6 7 it can still be used with previous versions The software version is indicated on the nameplate attached to the body of the drive Enhancements made to version V1 2 in comparison to V1 1 Factory setting Note 1 In version V1 1 the analog input was 0 10 V For safety reasons in the new version this input has been to 0 10 V Note 2 In version V1 1 analog output AO1 was assigned to the motor frequency
286. mit this new assignment pressing ENT has no effect and the message continues to flash It is only possible to exit by pressing ESC 154 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Summing input Subtracting input Multiplier Fri or Frib SA2 SA3 dA2 A dA3 MA2 4 or Frib SA2 SA3 dA2 dA3 x MA2 x If SA2 SA3 dA2 dA3 are not assigned they are set to 0 are not assigned they are set to 1 Ais limited by the minimum LSP and maximum HSP parameters For multiplication the signal on MA2 or is interpreted as a 10096 corresponds to the maximum value of the corresponding input If MA2 or MA3 is sent via the communication bus or graphic display terminal an MFr multiplication variable page 52 must be sent via the bus or graphic display terminal Reversal of the direction of operation in the event of a negative result can be inhibited see page 146 AAV49426 04 2014 155 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Ref 1B switching ch active Fr1 See the diagrams on pages 139 and 140 ch1 active Fr1 no switching Ref 1 channel Fr1 active ch1B active Fr1b no switching Ref 1B channel Fr1b active LH L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 to CD14 If
287. monitoring is resumed on leaving forced local mode AAV49426 04 2014 269 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 6 COMMAND 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT ENT 1 9 COMMUNICATION ENT 1 DRIVE MENU 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS E ZW 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 11 IDENTIFICATION 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 12 FACTORY SETTINGS 1 13 USER MENU 1 14 PROGRAMMABLE CARD RUN Term _ 50 0082 80 RUN Term _ 50 0082 80 This screen indicates the state of the drive at the FAULT HISTORY internal com link moment the selected fault occurred internal com link Drive state ETA status word ETI status word Cmd word Motor current Output frequency Elapsed time Line voltage ENT Motor thermal state internal com link Command Channel T Channel ref active Code Quick RUN Term _ 50 0082 80 This screen indicates the number of MORE FAULT INFO communication faults for example with the option Network fault cards Application fault Number from 0 to 65535 Internal link fault 1 Internal For Encoder Fault which is only visible VW3 408 or VW3 409 has been inserted the figure displayed corresponds to one of the fault codes summarized in the table on the next page Encoder Fau
288. mp up to 99 99 seconds 0 1 Ramp up to 999 9 seconds 1 Ramp up to 6000 seconds 0 1 0 1 This parameter is valid for Acceleration ACC Deceleration Acceleration 2 AC2 and Deceleration 2 dE2 Acceleration 1 0 01 to 6000 s 2 3 0s Time to accelerate from 0 to the Rated motor freq FrS page 78 or Nominal freq sync FrSS page 87 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven 0 01 to 6000 s 2 Deceleration 1 3 08 Time to decelerate from the Rated motor FrS page 78 or Nominal freq sync FrSS page 87 to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 Range 0 01 to 99 99 s or 0 1 to 999 9 s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 158 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 0 Begin Acc round MG Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a of the Acceleration ACC or Acceleration 2 AC2 ramp time Can be set between 0 and 10096 The parameter can be accessed if the Ramp type rPt is Customized CUS End Acc round 1 196 Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a of the Acceleration ACC or Acceleration
289. n can result in equipment damage If Motor control type Ctt page 72 Sync mot SYn the Motor fluxing FLU parameter MUST be active No FnO is not permitted this parameter causes rotor angle detection or alignment depending on the configuration of Angle setting type ASt page 89 and not fluxing f Brake assignment page 181 is not No nO the Motor fluxing FLU parameter has no effect Note If Angle setting type ASt W o load nLd the motor may rotate one full revolution during measurement to 999 9 s 05 Maximum operating time at Low speed LSP see page 45 Following operation at LSP for a defined period a motor stop is requested automatically The motor will restart if the reference is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present Caution A value of 0 indicates an unlimited period of time Note If Low speed time out tLS is not 0 Type of stop Stt page 162 is forced to Ramp stop rMP only if a ramp stop can be configured 0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz See page 166 Reference in jog operation g Jog delay 0102 05 166 Anti repeat delay between 2 consecutive jog operations 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be access
290. n is complete With the graphic display terminal see previous page Save config L1 No nO Config 0 Str0 Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s Config 1 StrO Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s Config 2 50 Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s The active configuration to be saved does not appear for selection For example if it is Config 0 5170 only Config 1 Str1 and Config 2 Str2 appear The parameter changes back to No nO as soon as the operation is complete List of motor parameters 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC menu Rated motor power nPr Rated motor volt UnS Rated mot current nCr Rated motor freq FrS Rated motor speed nSP Auto tuning tUn Auto tuning status tUS Angle auto test ASA Angle offset value ASU 00 UO to U5 U5 F1 F1 to F5 F5 V constant power UCP Freq Const Power FCP Nominal sync nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS Syn EMF constant PHS Autotune L d axis LdS Autotune L q axis LqS Cust stator R syn rSAS IR compensation UFr Slip compensation SLP motor parameters that can be accessed in Expert mode pages 82 and 87 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Mot therm current ItH Example of total return to factory settings 1 Config Source FCSI lt Macro Conf Inl 2 PARAMETER GROUP LIST FrY All ALL
291. n selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming 186 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Rollback management In some lift applications gearless with high inertia a jerk can be felt in the car at the very beginning of the movement when the break is opened At this time because no external weight sensor is used the torque applied by the motor is not yet at the level required to hold the car A little movement up or down depending on the overall balance occurs This movement is know as rollback The rollback management function is only available in closed loop Motor control type Ctt page 72 lt Sync CL FSY or FVC FUC It increases drive control stiffness during the mechanical brake release to cancel any movement during the brake opening time Brake Release time brt page 182 Speed reference Speed of the car without rollback management function Rollback gt time Mechanical brake time The Rollback MGT rbM function can be used to avoid the rollback effect once the following settings are done The speed loop parameters must be set and must not be modified after the Rollback MGT rbM function activation An adequate Encoder filter value FFr page 123 should be set and mu
292. nce Following a power outage the drive can restart without having to clear the Undervoltage USF fault mode if the corresponding logic input is at 1 at the same time CAUTION This input must not be at 1 when the drive is powered from the line supply To ensure this and also avoid any short circuits supply changeover contactors must be used Set this input to 0 before connecting the emergency power supply to the line supply Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Evacuation assign No nO Function not assigned L11 LI1 to LI6 LI7 LI7 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted Evacuation is activated when the assigned input is at 1 if the drive is stationary Evacuation is deactivated when the assigned input is at 0 as soon as the drive stops 220 to 320 V 220V Evacuation Input V Minimum permissible AC voltage value of the emergency power supply The parameter can be accessed if Evacuation assign rFt is not No nO Evacuation Value of the evacuation mode frequency reference The parameter can be accessed if Evacuation assign rFt is not No nO The adjustment range is determined by the Low speed LSP page 57 Rated motor freq FrS page
293. ncy ref Torque reference Output frequency Motor current ENA avg speed Motor speed Motor voltage Motor power Motor torque Mains voltage Motor thermal state Drv thermal state DBR thermal state Consumption Run time Power on time IGBT alarm counter PID reference PID feedback PID error PID Output ess el to 06 Config active Utilised param set E E El Ej E B I E El o 8 o El can only be accessed if Display value type List in Hz parameter displayed in factory configuration as a 96 in Hz in A in Hz in rpm in V in W as a 96 in V as a 96 as a 96 as a 96 in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating in hours length of time the motor has been switched on in hours length of time the drive has been switched on in seconds total time of IGBT overheating alarms as a 96 as a 96 as a 96 in Hz Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted CNFO 1 or 2 see page 224 can only be accessed if Display value type List SET1 2 or 3 see page 223 can only be accessed if Display value type List Select the parameter s using ENT a then appears next to the parameter Parameter s can also be deselected using ENT PARAMETER SELEC
294. ndicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input 14 Al 4 20 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input Lim att SSA Torque limit alarm Th att tAd Drive thermal state attained IGBT alarm tJA IGBT alarm Torque Control al Torque control alarm Brake al Braking resistor temperature alarm Option al APA Alarm generated by an option card Regen underV al UrA Reserved Rope slack alarm rSdA Rope slack see Rope slack config rSd parameter page 195 High torque alarm ttHA Motor torque overshooting high threshold High torque thd ttH page 69 Low torque alarm ttLA Motor torque undershooting low threshold Low torque thd ttL page 69 Freq meter Alarm FqLA Measured speed threshold attained Pulse warning thd FqL page 70 Dynamic load alarm Load variation detection see DYNAMIC LOAD dLd page 262 See the multiple selection procedure on page 31 for the integrated display terminal and page 22 for the graphic display terminal Identical to ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION A1C sid Identical to ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION A1C 136 AAV49426 04 2014 1 6 COMMAND CtL With graphic display terminal Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL RDY Term 0 00 2 0A 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Code lt lt 1
295. nertia of the load which can cause an overvoltage fault No nO Function inactive Yes YES Function active for applications that do not require strong deceleration The following selections appear depending on the rating of the drive and Motor control type Ctt page 72 They enable stronger deceleration to be obtained than with Yes YES Use comparative testing to determine your selection When Dec ramp adapt brA is configured on High torq X dYnX the dynamic performances for braking are improved by the addition of a current flow component The aim is to increase the iron loss and magnetic energy stored in the motor High torq A dYnA Addition of a constant current flow component High torq B dYnb Addition of a current flow component oscillating at 100 Hz High torq C 4 Addition of a current flow component oscillating at 200 Hz but with a greater amplitude Dec ramp adapt brA is forced to No nO if the brake logic control Brake assignment bLC is assigned page 181 or if Braking balance DbA page 104 7 Yes YES The factory setting changes to High torq A dYnA with certain ratings if Sinus filter page 74 Yes YES The function is incompatible with applications requiring Positioning on a ramp The use of a braking resistor the resistor would not operate correctly If Speed loop type SSL High perfor HPF it is advisable de assign Dec ramp a
296. ng Check the encoder s mechanical coupling 294 AAV49426 04 2014 Faults Causes Remedies Control Eeprom Probable cause Internal memory fault control card Power Eeprom Internal memory fault power card Faults which cannot be reset automatically continued Check the environment electromagnetic compatibility Turn off reset return to factory settings Inspect repair the drive Encoder Encoder feedback fault Check all the configuration parameters for the encoder used Refer to the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu for the value of parameter RESE Check that the encoder s mechanical and electrical operation its power supply and connections are all correct If necessary reverse the direction of rotation of the motor Dutput Ph rotation PHr parameter page 73 or the encoder signals Out contact stuck The output contactor remains closed although the opening conditions have been met Check the contactor and its wiring Check the feedback circuit IGBT desaturation Short circuit or grounding at the drive output Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor and the motor insulation Perform the diagnostic tests via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu internal com link Communication fault between option card and drive Check the environment electromagnetic compatibility Check the connections Check that no more than 2 option cards max permitted have been in
297. ng direction is reversed 0 to 10 0 Hz Auto AUtO Jump at reversal 1 The parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 is not FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY and if Movement type bSt page 181 is Hoisting UEr O Auto AUtO The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor calculated using the drive parameters 0 to 10 Hz Manual control When the reference direction is reversed this parameter can be used to avoid loss of torque and consequential release of load on transition to zero speed Parameter is not applicable if Engage at reversal bEd Yes YES Time to restart 1 to 15 00 s 0 Time between the end of a brake engage sequence and the start of a brake release sequence 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu 2 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the drive nameplate Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 183 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Brake control logic expert parameters Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting br HU 60 Selection of the brake restart sequence if a run command is repeated while the brake is engaging 0 0 0 The engage release sequence is executed in full 1 O 1 1 The brake is released immediately Use in open loop and closed loop mode Ar
298. nk 1 Powering down causes loss of measurement data in the following cases With a VW3 A3 401 to 407 card Every time the power section is turned off even if the drive control section has a separate power supply for example if the line contactor function has been configured With a VW3 A3 409 card and a SinCos encoder Every time the power section is turned off if the drive control section does not have a separate power supply Only when the drive control section is turned off if it has a separate power supply via the 0 and P24 terminals If the number of poles of the resolver is not a multiple of the number of poles of the motor 90 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Motor fluxing No FnO Not cont Non continuous mode O Continuous FCt Continuous mode This option is not possible if Angle setting type ASt page 92 is With load brC or if Auto DC injection AdC page 164 is Yes YES or if Type of stop Stt page 162 is Freewheel nSt No FnO Function inactive This option is not possible if Motor control type Ctt page 72 SVC I or FVC FUC If Motor control type Ctt page 72 SVC I FVC FUC or Sync mot SYn the factory setting is replaced by Not cont FnC If Motor control type Ctt page 72 SVC V the factory setting is replaced by
299. nly Decrease ref speed 0 to 599 Hz Decrease in the base reference during the traverse control cycle traverse ctrl L1 No nO Function not assigned L11 1 See the assignment conditions on page 145 When the state of the assigned input or bit changes to 1 the traverse control operating time is reset to zero along with Decrease ref speed dtF AAV49426 04 2014 233 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Inspection The inspection function is designed for elevator applications It can only be accessed if the brake logic control and output contactor command functions have already been assigned It is used for operation at a fixed preset speed that is independent of all other references and over which it takes priority The whole trajectory of the elevator can thus be covered and the necessary checks performed This function requires Alogic input to control the inspection mode An appropriate frequency reference inspection speed When the assigned logic input is at state 1 inspection mode is activated When a run command is given the motor starts up normally with output contactor command and brake logic control until it reaches the inspection speed When the run command is disabled the motor changes to freewheel stop and brake logic control and output contactor command functions are triggered immediately Name Description Adjustmen
300. nt of an undervoltage FIt amp R10pen 0 Fault and fault relay open FIt amp R1close 1 Fault and fault relay closed Alarm 2 Alarm and fault relay remains closed The alarm can be assigned to a logic output or a relay According to drive According to drive voltage rating voltage rating Mains voltage Rated voltage of the line supply in V For ATV71ATV71eeeM3 200Vac 200 200 Volts AC 220Vac 220 220 Volts AC 240Vac 240 240 Volts AC 260Vac 260 260 Volts AC factory setting For ATV71eeeN4 380Vac 380 380 Volts AC 400Vac 400 400 Volts AC 440Vac 440 440 Volts AC 460Vac 460 460 Volts AC 480Vac 480 480 Volts AC factory setting For ATV61eeeS6X 500Vac 500 500 Volts AC 600Vac 600 600 Volts AC factory setting SE d S e d Undervoltage level Undervoltage fault trip level setting in V The adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the drive voltage rating and the Mains voltage UrES value Undervolt time out 0 2510 399915 025 Time delay for taking undervoltage fault into account No nO UnderV prevention Behavior in the event of the undervoltage fault prevention level being reached L1 No nO No action O DC Maintain MMS This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the DC bus voltage as long as possible O Ramp stop rMP Stop following an ad
301. ntrol access LAC configuration 30 AAV49426 04 2014 Integrated display terminal Accessing menu parameters Save and store the displayed selection D Menu Parameter Value or assignment The display flashes when a value is stored Ep dEL Next parameter 6 6 un m 1 flash save kro All the menus are drop down type menus which means that after the last parameter if you continue to press W you will return to the first parameter and conversely you can Switch from the first parameter to the last parameter by pressing Selection of multiple assignments for one parameter ar Alarm not selected Alarm selected Example List of group 1 alarms in INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG 1 menu A number of alarms can be selected by checking them as follows The digit on the right indicates H selected not selected The same principle is used for all multiple selections AAV49426 04 2014 31 2 ACCESS LEVEL LAC With graphic display terminal Basic Access to 5 menus only and access to 6 submenus only in the 1 DRIVE MENU menu A single function can be assigned to each input RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 2 ACCESS LEVEL RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 DRIVE MENU 2 ACCESS LEVEL 3 OPEN SAVE AS MAIN MENU RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A EBSA 1 2 MONITORING 1 3 SETTI
302. o configuration The Macro configuration CFG parameter does not change although Customized macro CCFG disappears Note The factory settings that appear in the parameter tables correspond to Macro configuration CFG lt Start Stop StS This is the macro configuration set at the factory 40 AAV49426 04 2014 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Example diagrams for use with the macro configurations Hoisting HSt diagram _3 Forward Reverse 1 d A au 12 L3 LI1 24 LI2 ATV71Heeee 49 41 Electromagnetic brake 1 A contact on the Preventa module must be inserted in the brake control circuit to engage it safely when the Power Removal safety function is activated see connection diagrams in the Installation Manual Mast slave MSL diagram Speed Torque p Forward Reverse Forward Reverse L0 12 B 424 u2 424 13 71 ATV 71Heeee Master drive Slave drive Y A01 COM OOOO When the two motors are mechanically connected the Speed torque contact closing results in operation in Mast slave mode The master drive regulates the speed and controls the slave drive in torque mode to ensure distribution of the load AAV49426 04 2014 41 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Name Description Adjustment range ECC 2 3 wire control
303. o 100096 Speed time integral 1 This parameter can be accessed if Speed loop type SSL Standard Std Speed loop integral time constant K speed loop filter 1 0 to 100 This parameter can be accessed if Speed loop type SSL Standard Std Speed loop filter coefficient Inertia Mult Coef This parameter can be accessed if Speed loop type SSL High perfor HPF Increment for Application Inertia JAPL and Estim app inertia JESt parameters calculated by the drive in read only mode 0 1 gm 1 gm 10 gm 100 gm 1000 gm Estim app inertia 110 9993 This parameter can be accessed if Speed loop type SSL High perfor HPF The inertia being driven is estimated by the drive according to the motor parameters in read only mode Speed loop default settings are determined by the drive from this inertia Increment given by Inertia Mult Coef JMUL 0 1 2 1 gm 10 gm 100 gm or 1000 gm App Inertia Coef 0 10 to 100 This parameter can be accessed if Speed loop type SSL High perfor HPF Coefficient which fix the ratio between Estim app inertia JESt and Application Inertia JAPL parameters The default value is equal to 1 or 30 if Macro configuration CFG page 42 Lift LIFt and Motor control type Ctt page 72 Sync mot SYn or Sync CL FSY Application Inertia JAPL Estim app inertia
304. o 15 parameters using ENT a tick then appears next to the parameter Parameter s can also be deselected using ENT Example PARAMETER SELECTION 1 3 SETTINGS Ramp increment SET 1 The parameter can be accessed if at least 1 parameter has been selected PARAMETER SELECTION Making an entry in this parameter opens a settings window containing the selected parameters in the order in which they were selected With the graphic display terminal RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A Term 0 00Hz 0A SET1 Acceleration Acceleration Deceleration Acceleration 2 9 51 S Deceleration 2 Begin Acc round 8 i E Max 999 9 With the integrated display terminal Proceed as in the Settings menu using the parameters that appear SET 2 The parameter can be accessed if at least 1 parameter has been selected PARAMETER SELECTION Procedure identical to SET 1 PS1 SET 3 The parameter can be accessed if 3 parameter sets is not No and if at least 1 parameter has been selected in PARAMETER SELECTION Procedure identical to SET 1 PS1 Note We recommend that a parameter set switching test is carried out while stopped and check is made to ensure that it has been performed correctly Some parameters are interdependent and in this case may be restricted at the time of switching Interdependencies between parameters must be respected even betw
305. o be performed This configuration is not accessible for other Motor control type Ctt values Speed ref PGr The encoder provides a reference Can only be selected with an incremental encoder card Coder rotation No nO The parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted Activation of coder rotation inversion For some mountings the direction of right hand turn of the coder is reversed compare to that of the motor In this case the activation of this parameter is required to have a common direction of right hand between the motor and the coder No nO Inversion activated Yes YES Inversion not activated 120 AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting CONF Number of pulses Number of pulses per encoder revolution This parameter can be accessed if a VW3 A3 401 to 407 card or VW3 A3 411 has been inserted Encoder EnC Reference type The parameter can be accessed if Encoder usage Speed ref PGr Encoder EnC Use of an encoder incremental encoder only Freq gen PtG Use of a frequency generator absolute speed setpoint 300 to 300 kHz 0 Freq min value The parameter can be accessed if Encoder usage EnU Speed ref PGr and if Reference type PGA Freq gen PtG Frequency corresponding to the minim
306. o torque control mode Ifthe torque does not return to the required value at the end of a configurable period of time the drive will switch to fault or alarm mode A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that the changes in the behavior of the motor do not present any danger Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury Torque Torque limitation Torque C reference D Speed reference AB and CD Fallback to speed regulation BC Torque control zone E Ideal operating point The torque sign and value can be transmitted via a logic output and an analog output AAV49426 04 2014 205 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Trq spd switching L1 No nO Function inactive thereby preventing access to other parameters O Yes YES Permanent torque control L11 LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 145 If the assigned input or bit is at 1 Torque control If the assigned input or bit is at 0 Speed regulation Torque ref channel No nO Not assigned zero torque reference 11 Analog input 12 A12 Analog input AI3 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 I O card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Int
307. oad O Optimised brCO Measurement without motion possible with or without load brake engaged or released Optimization of the angle detection time starting from the second detection request even after a power off of the product Note 1 If Angle setting type ASt W o load nLd Measured Ld axis LAMS Measured Lq axis LqMS then Angle auto test ASA will not be executed Note 2 If Motor control type Ctt lt Sync mot SYn or Sync CL FSY then Angle setting type ASt Optimised brCO Angle auto test No nO Measurement of the phase shift angle between the motor and the encoder L1 No nO Measurement not performed or has failed or Output Ph rotation PHr has been modified or Coder rotation inv EnRI parameter has been modified O Yes YES Measurement is performed as soon as possible then the parameter automatically changes to Done dOnE Done dOnE Use of the value given the last time the measurement was performed Important e Itis essential that all the motor parameters are configured correctly before performing measurements Nominal I sync nCrS Current Limitation CLI Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS Syn EMF constant PHS Autotune L d axis 195 L q axis Cust stator R syn rSAS Measurement is only performed if no stop command has been activated If a freewheel stop or fast stop function has
308. of shown for information only as these selections can only be configured in the 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun menu Brk control Brake contactor control Input cont LLC Line contactor control Output cont OCC Output contactor control End reel EbO End of reel traverse control function Sync wobble tSY Counter wobble synchronization DC charging dCO DC bus precharging contactor control DO1 delay time 0 to 9999 ms The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at O The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true DO1 active at Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments 001 holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt Brk control DC charging 4 and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false 1 POS AAV49426 04 2014 129
309. ofile is defined by the values of parameters UnS FrS and UO Frequency S 72 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Motor control type continued V F 5pts UF5 5 segment V F profile Similar to V F 2 pts profile but also supports the avoidance of resonance saturation Voltage UnS 4 U5 The profile is defined by the values of parameters UnS FrS UO to U5 and F1 to F5 FrS gt F5 FA F3 F2 gt F1 Frequency Sync mot SYn For permanent magnet synchronous motors with sinusoidal electromotive force EMF only This selection makes the asynchronous motor parameters inaccessible and the synchronous motor parameters accessible Sync CL FSY Closed loop synchronous motor For permanent magnet synchronous motors with sinusoidal electromotive force EMF only with encoder This selection is only possible if an encoder card has been inserted It makes the asynchronous motor parameters inaccessible and the synchronous motor parameters accessible This function is not possible however when using an incremental encoder that generates signal A only is essential that the encoder check detailed on page 76 is performed successfully before selecting Sync CL FSY Max frequency 10 to 599 Hz The factory setting is 60 Hz or preset to 72 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr is set to 60 Hz The maxim
310. on has been configured Power consumption Wh kWh or MWh Run time Length of time the motor has been turned on Power on time Length of time the drive has been turned on seconds minutes or hours IGBT alarm counter Length of time the IGBT temperature alarm has been active seconds PID reference Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured PID feedback Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured PID error Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured as a process value PID Output Can be accessed if the PID function has been configured tIME dAY Current date and time generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Word generated by the Controller Inside card can be accessed if the card has been inserted Config active CnFO 1 or 2 can be accessed if motor or configuration switching has been enabled see page 226 Utilised param set CFP1 2 or 3 can be accessed if parameter switching has been enabled see pag
311. onfigured page 268 Note These assignments are reinitialized every time the macro configuration changes Input Start Stop handling Gen Use Hoisting Lift PID regul Network C Mast slave output Ref 1 Ref 1 Ref 1 Ref 1 Ref 1 Ref 1 channel Ref 2 channel Ref 1 channel channel channel channel channel PID reference Ref 1 channel channel integrated Modbus 1 Al2 No Summing ref Summing ref No PID feedback No Torque 2 2 reference AO1 No No No No No No No No R1 No drive 4 No drive flt No drive flt No drive flt No drive fit No drive flt No drive flt No drive flt R2 No No No Brk control Brk control No No No 2 wire Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward LI2 2 wire Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse LI3 2 wire No 2 preset Jog Fault reset 2 preset PID integral Ref 2 Trq spd speeds speeds reset switching switching LI4 2 wire 4 preset Fault reset External fault 4 preset 2 preset PID Fault reset Fault reset speeds speeds ref LI5 2 wire 8 preset Torque No Fault reset 14 preset PID No No speeds limitation ref LI6 2 wire Fault reset No No No No No No LI1 3 wire Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop LI2 3 wire Forward Fo
312. ons assigned to each input If no functions have been assigned nO is displayed Use the and W arrows to scroll through the functions If a number of functions have been assigned to the same input check that they are compatible AAV49426 04 2014 53 1 2 MONITORING SUP With integrated display terminal Drive internal states and values Name Description Alarm groups Current alarm group numbers Internal PID reference PID reference via graphic display terminal can be accessed if the function has been configured as a process value Multiplication coefficient can be accessed if Multiplier ref 2 page 157 has been assigned Frequency ref Hz Torque reference Can be accessed if the function has been configured Output frequency Hz The measured motor speed is displayed if an encoder card has been inserted otherwise 0 appears Hz Frequency of the Pulse input input used by the FREQUENCY METER FqF function page 260 Hz Motor current A avg SPEED The parameter can be accessed if EnA YES see page 100 Hz Motor speed Motor voltage V Motor power Motor torque Line voltage Line voltage from the point of view of the DC bus motor running or stopped V Motor thermal state Drv thermal state DBR thermal state be accessed if DB res protection brO functi
313. or detecting load variation page 261 via the DYNAMIC LOAD DETECT dLd menu e Short circuit faults on the braking unit can now be configured via Brake res fault Mgt bUb page 263 Menu 7 DISPLAY CONFIG In 7 4 KEYPAD PARAMETERS page 291 the KEYPAD CONTRAST and KEYPAD STAND BY parameters to adjust the contrast and stand by mode of the graphic display unit Enhancements made to version V1 3 8383 in comparison to V1 2 New parameters and functions Menu 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC New option of operating with Closed loop synchronous motor page 88 Angle auto test ASA page 89 Angle offset value ASU page 90 Sync CL FSY assignment page 73 of parameter Motor control type Ctt Menu 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Resolver Exct Freq FrES and Resolver poles nbr rPPn page 121 Menu 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT Fun New Inspection function page 234 with Inspection ISP and Inspection speed ISrF parameters AAV49426 04 2014 7 Software enhancements Enhancements made to version V1 7 8383 in comparison to V1 3 5383 New parameters and functions Menu 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Addition of a Lift LIFt macro configuration to the Macro configuration CFG parameter page 42 Menu 1 3 SETTINGS SEt New parameters Fr Loop Stab StA page 57 FreqLoopGain FLG page 57 Menu 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC This menu has been reorganized with parameters now
314. or more functions in order to be able to enable another Check the compatibility table below AAV49426 04 2014 151 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Compatibility table 9 90 5 5 Pa 12 18 5 oO zi amp 2 8 S 3 8 5 3 2 g 5 Ala le 8 9 3 8 5 9 gt 8 9 EN IA g 9 S a 8 E v 5 5 S c o o c a o o D o m o c o o 2 E I 5 S eg 22 o 186 1 2 Sz 6 2 5 5 5 5 5 5 g 5 e 2 2 8 ls 2 2 8 5 lt lt Js 8 o o 9 3 aimo o 5 25 5 2 g 5 2 2 5 o o 5 G o a g gt 15 5 5 8 jo 8 8 2 g c o 0 2 D c c c D Sig Pig 5 e lt 2 2 18 8 2 je B g o o g gt s BD SS m 5 5 5 9 2 2 515 5 2 Y F gt S jo o lt 5 jo Reference operations page 157 t e t 1 speed 3 page 171 Management of limit switches page 176 e Preset speeds pag
315. or parameters with a symbol in the code column which be modified with the drive running or stopped PTC probes 3 sets of PTC probes can be managed by the drive in order to protect the motors e 1onlogic input LI6 converted for this use by switch SW2 on the control card 10n each of the 2 option cards VW3A3201 and VW3A3202 Each of these sets of PTC probes is monitored for the following faults Motor overheating Sensor break fault Sensor short circuit fault Protection via PTC probes does not disable protection via 14 calculation performed by the drive the two types of protection can be combined 242 AAV49426 04 2014 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting LI6 PTC probe Can be accessed if switch SW2 the control card is to PTC No nO Not used L1 Always AS PTC probe faults are monitored permanently even if the power supply is not connected as long as the control remains connected to the power supply O Power ON rdS PTC probe faults are monitored while the drive power supply is connected O Motor ON rS probe faults are monitored while the motor power supply is connected PTC1 probe Can be accessed if a VW3A3201 option card has been inserted No nO Not used Always AS PTC probe faults are monitored permanently even if the power supply is not connected as long as th
316. or running in reverse High torque alarm ttHA Motor torque overshooting high threshold High torque thd page 69 Low torque alarm ttLA Motor torque undershooting low threshold Low torque thd ttL page 69 Freq meter Alarm FqLA Measured speed threshold attained Pulse warning thd FqL page 70 52 AAV49426 04 2014 1 2 MONITORING SUP With integrated display terminal This menu can be used to display the drive inputs states and internal values Code Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Can be used to display the functions assigned to each input If no functions have been assigned nO is displayed Use the and W arrows to scroll through the functions If a number of functions have been assigned to the same input check that they are compatible Can be used to visualize the state of logic inputs LI1 to LI8 display segment assignment high 1 low 0 wb DV Ci State0 ak 2Sa LI1 LI2 LI3 14 15 16 17 118 Example above 11 and LI6 are at 1 112 to LI5 LI7 and LI8 are 0 Can be used to visualize the state of logic inputs LI9 to 1114 and PR Power Removal display segment assignment high 1 low 0 wb 6 4 1111 State 0 OT LI9 LINO LI11 LI12 LI13 114 PR Example above LI9 and 1114 are at 1 1110 to LI13 are at 0 and PR Power Removal is at 1 Can be used to display the functi
317. other functions See table on page 151 Modbus fault mgt Freewheel YES Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with integrated Modbus Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop O Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 162 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 108 if control is via the terminals fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 151 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication AAV49426 04 2014 257 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Load slip detection L1 No nO Fault not monitored Only the alarm
318. parameter can be accessed if AI2 Type Al2t Current 0 A 0 to 10 0 V 12 max value The parameter can be accessed if AI2 Type AI2t Voltage 100 Al2 filter O to 10 005 Interference filtering AI2 range 0 100 POS L1 0 10096 POS Unidirectional input 10096 nEG Bidirectional input Example On a 0 10 V input corresponds to reference 100 5 V corresponds to reference 0 10 V corresponds to reference 100 Al2 Interm point X 0 to 100 Input delinearization point coordinate 0 corresponds to Min value if the range is 0 100 Max value Min value 0 corresponds to 2 if the range is 10096 100 10096 corresponds to Max value Al2 Interm point Y 0 to 100 Output delinearization point coordinate frequency reference 114 AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting AI3 assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured It displays all the functions associated with input AI3 in order to check for example for compatibility problems AI3 Type Current 0 A Read only parameter cannot be configured O Current 0 A Current input min value 0 to 20 0 mA 0 to 20 0 mA AI3 max value AIS filter 0 to 10 00 s Interference filtering
319. positive or negative logic of the bits or inputs assigned to the stop O Active low LO Stop controlled on a falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the assigned bits or inputs Active high HIG Stop controlled on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned bits or inputs Slowdown forward 00 Same assignments possible as for Stop FW limit sw SAF above Slowdown reverse Same assignments possible as for Stop FW limit sw SAF above Slowdown limit cfg Active high HIG The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one slowdown sensor has been assigned It defines the positive or negative logic of the bits or inputs assigned to the slowdown Active low LO Slowdown controlled on a falling edge change from 1 to 0 of the assigned bits or inputs Active high HIG Slowdown controlled on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned bits or inputs AAV49426 04 2014 219 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting A Disable limit sw No nO The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned L1 No nO Not assigned L11 1 See the assignment conditions on page 145 The action of the limit switches is disabled when the assigned bit or input is at 1 If at this time the drive is stopped or being slowed down by limit
320. prevention of tripping on an Overspeed SOF fault ENA SYSTEM authorizes overspeed which can trigger an Overspeed SOF fault To avoid this occurring it is advisable to increase the value of the following parameters slightly Max frequency tFr page 73 Overspd pulse thd FqA page 260 if the frequency meter function is configured AAV49426 04 2014 99 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range ENA system No nO This parameter can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt SVC V UUC see page 72 No nO Function inactive Yes YES Function active ENA prop gain 1 1 to 9999 This parameter can be accessed if ENA system EnA lt Yes YES ENA integral gain 1 01102992 This parameter can be accessed if ENA system EnA Yes YES Reduction ratio 1 This parameter can be accessed if ENA system EnA lt Yes YES 1 Parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 100 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Boost 100 to 100 0 The parameter can be accessed if ACCESS LEVEL Expert and if Motor control type Ctt page 72 is different from Sync CL FSY Adjustment of the motor magnetizing current at low speed as a of the rated m
321. provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure Examples of critical control functions are emergency stop overtravel stop power outage and restart Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions System control paths may include communication links Consideration must be given to the implications of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of the link Observe all accident prevention regulations and local safety guidelines Each implementation of the product must be individually and thoroughly tested for proper operation before being placed into service Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage a For USA Additional information refer to NEMA ICS 1 1 latest edition Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Control and to NEMA ICS 7 1 latest edition Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection Installation and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems AAV49426 04 2014 Documentation structure The following Altivar 71 technical documents are available on the Schneider Electric website www schneider electric com Installation Manual This describes how to assemble and connect the drive Programming manual This describes the functions parameters and use of the drive terminal integrated display terminal and graphic display ter
322. put scanner Visualization of registers exchanged periodically 8 input and 8 output AAV49426 04 2014 1 2 MONITORING SUP With graphic display terminal Drive internal states and values Name Description Alarm groups ALGr Frequency ref LFr Internal PID ref rPI Torque ref Ltr Multiplying coeff MFr Frequency ref FrH Torque reference trr Output frequency rFr Measured output fr MMF Pulse in work freq FqS Motor current LCr ENA avg speed AUS Motor speed SPd Motor voltage UOP Motor power OPr Motor torque Otr Mains voltage ULn Motor thermal state tHr Drv thermal state tHd DBR thermal state tHb Consumption APH Run time rtH Power on time PtH IGBT alarm counter tAC PID reference rPC PID feedback rPF PID error rPE PID Output rPO Date Time CLO 006 Config active CnFS Utilised param set CFPS ALARMS ALr OTHER STATE SSt Current alarm group numbers in Hz Frequency reference via the graphic display terminal can be accessed if the function has been configured as a process value PID reference via graphic display terminal can be accessed if the function has been configured as a 96 of the rated torque Torque reference via graphic display terminal as a can be accessed if Multiplier ref MA2 MA3 157 has been assigned in Hz as a 96 of th
323. r that can be modified during operation or when stopped 200 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting PID integral gain 0 01 to 100 Integral gain PID derivative gain 0 00 to 100 Derivative gain PID ramp 1 0 to 99 95 0s PID acceleration deceleration ramp defined to go from Min PID reference PIP1 to Max PID reference PIP2 and vice versa PID correct reverse No nO L1 No nO Yes YES Reversal of the direction of correction PIC If PIC nO the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive Example pressure control with a compressor If PIC lt YES the speed of the motor will decrease when the error is positive Example temperature control using a cooling fan F 1 500 to 500 or 599 to 0 Hz Min PID output 599 according to rating Minimum value of regulator output in Hz 1 0 to 500 or 599 Max PID output according to rating Maximum value of regulator output in Hz Min fbk alarm 1 Minimum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback Adjustment range from Min PID feedback PIF1 to Max PID feedback PIF2 2 Max fbk alarm 1 Maximum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback Adjustment range from Min PID feedback PIF1 to Max PID feedback PIF2 2 PID error Alarm 1 0 to 65535 2 Regulator error monitoring threshold
324. r the drive Motor short circuit Short circuit at drive output Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor and the motor s insulation Perform tests via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu Inspect repair the drive Modbus com Interruption in communication on the Modbus bus Check the communication bus Check the time out Refer to the Modbus User s Manual PC com Fault communicating with PC Software Check the PC Software connecting cable Check the time out HMI com Fault communicating with the graphic display terminal Check the terminal connection Check the time out TORQUE TIME OUT FLT The time out of the torque control function is attained Check the function s settings Check the state of the mechanism Torque current lim Switch to torque limitation Check if there are any mechanical problems Check the parameters of TORQUE LIMITATION tLA page 209 and the parameters of the TORQUE OR I LIM DETECT tld fault page 258 IGBT overheat Drive overheated Check the size of the load motor drive Reduce the switching frequency Wait for the motor to cool before restarting 298 AAV49426 04 2014 Faults Causes Remedies Faults that can be reset as soon as their causes disappear The USF fault can be inhibited and cleared remotely by means of a logic input or control bit Fault inhibit assign InH parameter page 256 Fa
325. r together 214 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Out contactor ass Logic output or control relay No nO Function not assigned in this case none of the function parameters can be accessed LO1 LO1 to LO4 LO4 Logic output if one or two I O cards have been inserted LO1 to LO2 or LO4 can be selected R2 r2 to R4 r4 Relay selection of R2 extended to R3 or R4 if one or two I O cards have been inserted dO1 dO1 Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output Selection can be made if AO 1 assignment AO1 page 132 7 No nO Output contact fdbk No nO L1 No nO Function inactive O L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 The motor starts up when the assigned input or bit changes to 0 Delay to motor run 0050605 Time delay for Motor control following the sending of a run command Output contactor fault monitoring if the feedback is assigned If the contactor fails to close at the end of the set time the drive will lock in FCF2 fault mode This parameter can be accessed if Out contactor ass OCC is assigned or if Output contact fdbk rCA is assigned The time delay must be greater than the closing time of the output contactor 010 5 00 5 Delay to open cont Time delay for output contactor opening com
326. rH4 BRH b4 freq bFtd represent the threshold level for b4 brH4 BRH b4 freq bFtd value depends from the installation mechanical response If BRH b4 freq bFtd is too low the drive may rise Load mvt al 05 when not needed If BRH 04 freq bFtd is too high a slip of the load may occur without Load mvt al DSA alarm WARNING LOSS OF CONTROL If the setting is too low the BRH 541 brH4 function might be activated untimely If the setting is too high the BRH 541 brH4 function might notbe activated when required Check and control that the setting is convenient for the application Failure to follow these instructions can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Motoring torque lim 0 101300 1276 See 209 Torque limitation in generator mode as a 96 or in 0 196 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Torque increment IntP parameter page 209 Gen torque lim Dito 156 See 209 Torque limitation in generator mode as a or in 0 196 increments of the rated torque in accordance with the Torque increment IntP parameter page 209 Traverse freq high 0 to 10 Hz 4 Hz See page 232 Traverse freq low See page 232 A Quick step High uh Teas freq See page 232 1 In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual or on the drive nameplate
327. re closely However if the value is too high overspeed occurs The optimum setting is obtained when the speed follows the ramp precisely this depends on the accuracy of the Application Inertia JAPL parameter page 96 and the Encoder filter value FFr parameter setting page 123 Initial response with FFP 0 Increase in FFP 47 Increase in FFP Reference division Reference division Reference division A A A 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 6 0 6 0 6 0 4 0 4 0 4 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Time in ms Time in ms Time in ms Increase in FFP 447 Reference division 4 1 2 1 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 j Time in ms Bandwidth feedfor FFU This is used to adjust the bandwidth of the dynamic torque feedforward term The effect of this parameter on ramp following is illustrated below Decreasing the value of FFU reduces the effect of noise on the speed reference torque ripple However too great a decrease in relation to the ramp settings on short ramps causes a delay and ramp following is adversely affected Increasing the value of FFU allows the ramp to be followed more closely but also heightens noise sensitivity The optimum setting is obtained by reaching the best compromise between ramp following and the existing noise sensitivity
328. rease the Time to restart ttr page 68 Speed fdback loss No resolver or encoder feedback signal No Top Z signal after the activation of the Top Z function and 2 cycles No signal on Pulse input if the input is used for speed measurement Check the wiring between the encoder or resolver and the drive Check the encoder or resolver Check all the configuration parameters for the encoder used Refer to the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu for the value of parameter RESE Check the wiring of the input cable and the detector used Auto tuning Special motor or motor whose power is not suitable for the drive Motor not connected to the drive Check that the motor drive are compatible Check that the motor is present during auto tuning If an output contactor is being used close it during auto tuning 296 AAV49426 04 2014 Faults Causes Remedies Faults that can be reset with the automatic restart function after the cause has disappeared These faults can also be reset by turning on and off or by means of a logic input or control bit Fault reset rSF parameter page 244 APF CnF COF EPF1 EPF2 FCF2 LFF2 LFF3 LFF4 ObF OHF OLF OPF1 OPF2 OSF OtF1 OtF2 OtFL PHF PtF1 PtF2 PtFL SLF1 SLF2 SLF3 SrF SSF and tJF faults can be inhibited and cleared remotely by means of a logic input or control bit Fault inhibit assign InH parameter page 256 Application fault Probab
329. rences Priority functions functions which cannot be active at the same time f The function indicated by the arrow has priority over the other Not applicable Note This compatibility table does not affect commands that can be assigned to the keys of the graphic display terminal see page 149 152 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Incompatible functions The following functions will be inaccessible or deactivated in the cases described below Automatic restart This is only possible for control type 2 3 wire control 2 wire 2C and 2 wire type tCt Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO See page 108 Catch a spinning load This is only possible for control type 2 3 wire control 2 wire 2C and 2 wire type tCt Level LEL or Fwd priority PFO See page 108 This function is locked if automatic injection on stop Auto DC injection AdC lt Continuous Ct See page 164 The SUP monitoring menu page 46 can be used to display the functions assigned to each input in order to check their compatibility When a function is assigned a y appears on the graphic display terminal as illustrated in the example below Term 0 00Hz 0A 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT REFERENCE SWITCH REF OPERATIONS RAMP STOP CONFIGURATION If you attempt to assign a function that is incompatible with another function that has already been assigned an alarm
330. rent limitation in motor mode in the Ascending direction only For the Descending direction operation is always in Speed reference mode Speed reference mode Ascend or Descend command Reference HSP FrS OSP 0 Frequency HSP Calculated limit 4 FrS 4 OSP OSP Adjustable speed step for load measurement tOS Load measuring time Two parameters are used to reduce the speed calculated by the drive for ascending and descending 192 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Limit imposed by current limitation t t A MU E o 5 5 o o E c g c 2 im im 5 O 193 SCL Adjustable speed threshold above which current limitation is active CLO Current limitation for high speed function AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Rope slack The rope slack function can be used to prevent starting up at high speed when a load has been set down ready for lifting but the rope is still slack as illustrated below 4 k AASS VIZI 1 1 D Speed 4 OSP Load 4 rstL 4 Note Operation will only be optimized in speed reference mode High speed hoisting HSO lt Speed ref 550 The speed step OSP
331. rformance speed loop Parameter settings for FreqLoopGain FLG and Fr Loop Stab StA These parameters can only be accessed if Speed loop type SSL page 95 High perf HPF Inertia The Estim app inertia JESt parameter page 95 is the default value of the inertia being driven estimated by the drive based on the motor parameters Speed loop default settings are determined by the drive from this inertia The value of the actual inertia being driven must be entered in the Application Inertia JAPL parameter page 96 This value is then used by the drive to optimize speed loop settings thus achieving the best results provided that the exact value has been entered The App Inertia Coef JACO parameter page 95 is used to fix the ratio between Estim app inertia JESt page 95 and Application Inertia JAPL Gains These parameters are used to adjust the response of the speed loop obtained from the inertia in particular when this is not known Fr Loop Stab StA Used to adapt the return to steady state after a speed transient according to the dynamics of the machine Gradually increase the stability to increase control loop attenuation and thus reduce any overspeed FreqLoopGain FLG Used to adapt the response of the machine speed transients according to the dynamics passband For machines with high resistive torque high inertia or fast cycles increase the gain gradually Initial response Ref
332. ric Product Support When PIN code 2 COd2 is not set to OFF the 1 2 MONITORING SUP menu is the only one visible Then if PIN code 2 COd2 is set to OFF drive unlocked all menu are visible If the display settings are modified in 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu and if PIN code 2 92 is not set to OFF the visibility configured is kept Then if PIN code 2 COd2 is set to OFF drive unlocked the visibility configured in 7 DISPLAY CONFIG menu is kept Upload rights Permitted ULrO Read or copy the current configuration to the drive Permitted ULrO The current drive configuration can always be uploaded to the graphic display terminal or PC Software L1 Not allowed ULr1 The current drive configuration can only be uploaded to the graphic display terminal or PC Software if the drive is not protected by an access code or if the correct code has been entered Download rights Unlock drv dLr1 Writes the current configuration to the drive or downloads a configuration to the drive Locked 0 A configuration file can only be downloaded to the drive if the drive is protected by an access code which is the same as the access code for the configuration to be downloaded Unlock drv dLr1 A configuration file can be downloaded to the drive or a configuration in the drive can be modified if the drive is unlocked access code entered or is not protected by an access code
333. riodic data the address the speed and the format etc is given for each bus RUN Term 50 00 2 COMMUNICATION Modbus 09 LED off Cmd value ABCD Hex 64 Active ref channel CANopen Frequency ref 12 5 Hz Communication via Modbus ETA state word 2153 Hex RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 MODBUS NETWORK DIAG W3141 2230 Hex COM LED W2050 2230 Mb NET frames nb W4325 F230 Hex Mb NET CRC errors WO0894 F230 Hex COM SCANNER INPUT MAP COM SCAN OUTPUT MAP CMD WORD IMAGE FREQ REF WORD MAP Communication via the graphic display terminal MODBUS NETWORK DIAG 1 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 MODBUS HMI DIAG MODBUS HMI DIAG CANopen MAP COM LED 69 Mb HMI frames nb Mb HMI CRC errors PDO configuration using the network tool Some PDOs cannot be Communication via CANopen used RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 CANopen MAP PDO1 IMAGE RUN LED Q Received PDO1 1 FDBA Hex ERR LED Received PDO1 2 Received PDO1 3 Received PDO1 4 Transmit PDO1 1 PDO1 IMAGE PDO2 IMAGE PDO3 IMAGE Canopen NMT state Transmit PDO1 2 Number of TX PDO Transmit PDO1 3 Number of PDO Transmit PDO1 4 Error code RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 RX Error Counter PDO2 IMAGE TX Error Counter Received PDO2 1 FDBA Hex Received PDO2 2 Received PDO2 3 Receive
334. rive in read only mode T2r Rotor time constant in mS calculated by the drive in read only mode Nominal motor slip Nominal slip in Hz calculated by the drive in read only mode To modify the nominal slip modify the Rated motor speed nSP page 78 Poles pair number Number of pairs of poles calculated by the drive in read only mode Cust stator resist Cold state stator resistance per winding modifiable value In milliohms up to 75 kW 100 HP and in hundredths of milliohms 0 100 above 75 kW 100 HP On the integrated display unit 0 to 9999 then 10 00 to 65 53 10000 to 65536 Idw Magnetizing current in A modifiable value Lfw Leakage inductance in mH modifiable value Cust rotor t const Rotor time constant in mS modifiable value 82 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Synchronous motor parameters These parameters can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 is set to Sync mot SYn In this case the asynchronous motor parameters cannot be accessed The motor should be cold during this procedure Once the drive is chosen 1 Enter the motor nameplate Configure Nominal sync nCrS Nom motor spdsync nSPS Pole pairs PPnS and Motor torque tqS Note Do not use Current limit 2 LC2 to do the Auto tuning tUn use Current Limitation CLI Adjust Current Limitation CLI in function of the maximum motor
335. rive connection Al2 4 20mA loss 4 20mA loss Al4 4 20mA loss Loss of the 4 20 mA reference on analog input Al2 AI3 or Al4 Check the connection on the analog inputs Overbraking Braking too sudden or driving load Increase the deceleration time Install a braking resistor if necessary Activate the Dec ramp adapt brA function page 161 if it is compatible with the application Drive overheat Drive temperature too high Braking unit over temperature Phase module over temperature Rectifier over temperature Check the motor load the drive ventilation and the ambient temperature Wait for the drive to cool down before restarting Motor overload Triggered by excessive motor current Check the setting of the motor thermal protection check the motor load Wait for the drive to cool down before restarting 1 output phase loss Loss of one phase at drive output Check the connections from the drive to the motor AAV49426 04 2014 297 Faults Causes Remedies Faults that can be reset with the automatic restart function after the cause has disappeared continued Name Fa 3 motor phase loss Probable cause Motor not connected or motor power too low Output contactor open Instantaneous instability in the motor current Remedy Check the connections from the drive to the motor If an output contactor is being used parameterize Outp
336. rward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward 3 wire Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse Reverse 114 3 wire 2 preset Jog Fault reset 2 preset PID integral Ref 2 Trq spd speeds speeds reset switching switching LI5 3 wire No 4 preset Fault reset External fault 4 preset 2 preset PID Fault reset Fault reset speeds speeds 116 3 wire 8 preset Torque No Fault reset 4 preset PID No No speeds limitation ref Option cards LI7 to 14 No No No No No No No LO1 to LO4 No No No No No No No R3 R4 No No No No No No No No Al3 Al4 No No No No No No No No RP No No No No No No No No AO2 motor motor motor motor I motor motor motor motor AO3 No Sign torque Sign torque Sign torque Output No Motor freq Graphic display terminal keys F1 key No No No No No No Control No via graphic display terminal F2 F3 F4 No No No No No No No No keys In 3 wire control the assignment of inputs LI1 to LI6 shifts AAV49426 04 2014 39 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Macro configuration parameters Other configurations and settings In addition to the assignment of I O other parameters are assigned only in Hoisting Lift and Mast slave macro confi
337. s forced to No nO No nO No brake monitoring 1 Hz to 599 Hz Adjustment of the motor frequency threshold for tripping abrake failure fault detection of speeds other than zero Pulse thd wo Run Time delay for taking brake failure fault into account 260 AAV49426 04 2014 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Load variation detection This detection is only possible with the high speed hoisting function It can be used to detect if an obstacle has been reached triggering a sudden upward increase or downward decrease in the load Load variation detection triggers a Dynamic load fault dLF fault The Dyn load Mgt dLb parameter can be used to configure the response of the drive in the event of this fault Load variation detection can also be assigned to a relay or a logic output There are two possible detection modes depending on the configuration of high speed hoisting Speed reference mode High speed hoisting HSO page 195 Speed 550 Torque variation detection During high speed operation the load is compared to that measured during the speed step The permissible load variation and its duration can be configured If exceeded the drive switches to fault mode Current limitation mode High speed hoisting HSO page 195 lt Current Limit CSO On ascend during high speed operation an increase in load will result in a drop in speed
338. s name while the key is held down Example ACC RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 01 i 0 1 3 SETTINGS 1 3 SETTINGS Ramp increment Code Ramp increment Acceleration gt Nee 1 s Deceleration 9 67 s Acceleration 2 12 58 s Deceleration 2 13 45 s Code lt lt gt gt Quick Deceleration Acceleration 2 Deceleration 2 Code lt lt Then use the parameter code index page 304 to find the page giving details of the displayed parameter AAV49426 04 2014 37 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM With graphic display terminal RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A MAIN MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 1 DRIVE MENU 1 1 SIMPLY START 2 3 wire control 2 ACCESS LEVEL 1 2 MONITORING 3 OPEN SAVE AS 1 3 SETTINGS 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG With integrated display terminal Power up m Displays the state of the drive The 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM menu can be used for fast startup which is sufficient for the majority of applications The parameters in this menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no run command is present with the following exceptions Auto tuning which causes the motor to start up The adjustment parameters on page 45 Note The parameters of the 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM menu must be entered in the order in which they appear as the later ones are dependent on the first ones For example 2 3 wire control must
339. s or 1 to 6000 s according to Ramp increment Inr page 158 Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 173 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Save reference Saving a speed reference value using a logic input command lasting longer than 0 1 s This function is used to control the speed of several drives alternately via a single analog reference and one logic input for each drive Itis also used to confirm line reference communication bus or network on several drives via a logic input This allows movements to be synchronized by getting rid of variations when the reference is set The reference is acquired 100 ms after the rising edge of the request A new reference is not then acquired until a new request is made F Motor frequency Reference 0 de Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Ref memo ass L1 No nO Function inactive L11 1 to LI6 LI6 LI7 LI7 to L110 1110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted O L111 L111 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted Assignment to a logic input Function active if the assigned input is at 1 174 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Limit switch management This function can be used to manage trajectory limits using limit switches The stop mode is configurable When the stop contact is
340. se warning thd 0 Hz to 30 00 kHz 0 Hz Speed threshold measured by the FREQUENCY METER FqF function page 260 assigned to a relay or a logic output see page 124 Freq threshold 0 0 to 599 Hz High speed HSP Frequency threshold for Freq Th att FtA function assigned used by the PARAM SET SWITCHING MLP function pag Freq threshold 2 to a relay or a logic outp e 222 0 0 to 599 Hz ut see page 124 or High speed HSP Frequency threshold for Freq Th 2 attain F2A function assi gned to a relay or a logic or used by the PARAM SET SWITCHING MLP function page 222 Freewheel stop Thd See page 162 0 0 to 599 Hz output see page 124 0 0 Hz This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a freewheel stop below a low speed threshold It can be accessed if Type of stop Stt Fast stop FSt or L1 0 0 Does not switch to freewheel stop Ramp stop rMP 0 1 to 599 Hz Speed threshold below which the motor will switch to freewheel stop Motor therm level See page 248 Trip threshold for motor thermal alarm logic output or relay 1 Load correction See page 104 Rated correction in Hz 0 to 11896 0 to 599 Hz These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the
341. set speed 5 Preset speed 6 Preset speed 7 Preset speed 8 Preset speed 9 Preset speed 10 Preset speed 11 Preset speed 12 Preset speed 13 Preset speed 14 Preset speed 15 Preset speed 16 1 UNT The appearance of these Preset speed x SPx parameters is determined by the number of speeds configured 1 The parameter can also be accessed in the 1 3 SETTINGS SEt menu Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV49426 04 2014 169 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn speed Two types of operation are available 1 Use of single action buttons Two logic inputs are required in addition to the operating direction s The input assigned to the speed command increases the speed the input assigned to the speed command decreases the speed 2 Use of double action buttons Only one logic input assigned to speed is required speed with double press buttons Description 1 button pressed twice 2 steps for each direction of rotation A contact closes each time the button is pressed Released speed 13 press 2 d press speed maintained faster Forward button aandb Reverse button c and d Example of wiring AIVTicontrod forward terminals Rev
342. side card if it is present COMMUNICATION MAP Communication data and values Alarm groups HMI Frequency ref p gt Drive internal drive states and values see page 52 RUN 1490 50 Move from one screen to another MTM a from LOGIC INPUT MAP to FREQ SIGNAL IMAGE by turning the navigation button ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE LOGIC OUTPUT MAP ANALOG OUTPUTS IMAGE FREQ SIGNAL IMAGE State 0 Term Access to the selected input or RUN qe 500045 LOGIC INPUT MAP output configuration LI1 assignment B RLM LI2 LI3 114 115 16 LI7 State 1 Press ENT 8 LI9 LI10 11 LI12 LI13 14 LI1 On Delay 1 om m m M M h orward Pre Fluxing RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE assignment ANALOG MASE ENT 9 11 9 87 Ref 1 channel 2 2 35 mA Forced local Torque reference min value 11 max value Code lt lt gt gt Quick RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 Term 50 00Hz 80 LOGIC OUTPUT MAP LO1 assignment ENT amp State 0 R1 R2 LO O Q 0000000000000010b LO1 delay time LO1 active at LO1 holding time 4 State 1 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80 ANALOG OUTPUTS IMAGE ENT AO1 assignment t 9 87 V Motor freq AO1 min output AO1 max output 1 Filter AO1 RUN Term 50 00Hz 80
343. sjust Syn EMF constant PHS rdAE should be closed to 0 If the 96 error EMF sync rdAE value is lower to 096 then Syn EMF constant PHS can be increased If the error EMF sync rdAE value is upper to 0 then Syn EMF constant PHS can be reduced Can be accessed if Motor control type Ctt page 72 Sync mot SYn or Sync CL FSY Synchronous motor parameters that can be accessed in Expert mode Name Description Measured Ld axis This parameter can be accessed if Tune Type tUnt is set to ALL ALL Measured Lq axis This parameter can be accessed if Tune Type tUnt is set to ALL ALL RtrS Cold state stator resistance per winding in read only mode This is the drive factory setting or the result of the auto tuning operation if it has been performed Value in milliohms up to 75 kW 100 HP and in hundredths of milliohms 100 above 75 kW 100 HP On the integrated display unit O to 9999 then 10 00 to 65 53 10000 to 65536 Nominal freq sync Motor frequency at rated speed in Hz calculated by the drive rated motor frequency in read only mode AAV49426 04 2014 87 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Closed loop synchronous motor Operation on a synchronous motor in a closed loop configuration requires an encoder providing the exact position of the motor rotor The phase shift angle of the encoder in relation to the rotor must therefore be de
344. st not be modified after the Rollback MGT rbM function activation An appropriate Brake release FW Ibr page 182 can be set to apply a current level that corresponds to the more frequent load case about 25 of the full load The opening brake sequence must be set with adequate Brake Release time brt typically brt 1 second Adjustment recommandations Good speed loop setting is essential for satisfactory rollback compensation results good tracking of the ramp and well damped response The speed loop setting optimization initially has to be done with the rollback function disable Rollback MGT rbM No no It is recommended to increase gradually Rbk Compensation rbC starting from 0 until rollback motion is reduced to the desired level If vibrations occur while increasing Rbk Compensation rbC it has to be reduced to stop them It is possible to increase the damping by increasing the Rbk Damping rbd setting It may allows to further increase the Rbk Compensation rbC Note Elevated Rbk Damping rbd setting may amplify the encoder quantization noise so it is recommended to keep this setting as low as possible Depending on the elevator system resonant frequencies and encoder feedback resolution there will be a practical limit on the performance of the rollback compensation function Low resolution encoders may not allow desired rollback management Note Sufficient time must be allowed after the brak
345. stalled on the drive Replace the option card Inspect repair the drive Rating error The power card is different from the card stored Check the reference of the power card Incompatible PB The power card is incompatible with the control card Check the reference of the power card and its compatibility Internal serial link Communication fault between the internal cards Check the internal connections Inspect repair the drive Internal mftg zone Internal data inconsistent Recalibrate the drive performed by Schneider Electric Product Support Internal fault option The option installed in the drive is not recognized Check the reference and compatibility of the option Internal hard init Initialization of the drive is incomplete Turn off and reset Internal ctrl supply The control power supply is incorrect Check the control section power supply Internal measure The current measurements are incorrect Replace the current sensors or the power card Inspect repair the drive Internal mains circuit The input stage is not operating correctly Perform the diagnostic tests via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu Inspect repair the drive Internal th sensor The drive temperature sensor is not operating correctly The braking unit s temperature sensor is not operating correctly Replace the drive temperature sensor Inspect repair the dr
346. stop or fast stop function has been assigned to a logic input this input must be set to 1 active at 0 Auto tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands which will be taken into account after the auto tuning sequence If auto tuning fails the drive displays No nO and depending on the configuration of Autotune fault mgt tnL page 263 may switch to Auto tuning tnF fault mode Auto tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds Do not interrupt the process Wait for the display to change to Done dOnE or No nO Automatic autotune L1 No nO Function inactive O Yes YES Auto tuning is performed on every power up Auto tune assign Assignment of auto tuning to a logic input or control bit L1 No nO Not assigned O 01 1 See the assignment conditions on page 145 Auto tuning is performed when the assigned bit or input changes to 1 AAV49426 04 2014 93 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Auto tuning state For information only cannot be modified Not done tAb The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor Pending PEnd Auto tuning has been requested but not yet performed In Progress PrOG Auto tuning in progress Failed FAIL Auto tuning has failed Done dOnE The stator resistance measured by the auto tuning function is used to control the motor Customiz
347. switches it will restart up to its speed reference Stop type Ramp stop rMP The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned O Ramp stop rMP On ramp O Fast stop FSt Fast stop ramp time reduced by Ramp divider dCF see page 162 Freewheel YES Freewheel stop Deceleration type peers The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned Standard Std Uses the Deceleration dEC or Deceleration 2 dE2 ramp depending on which has been enabled O Optimized OPt The ramp time is calculated on the basis of the actual speed when the slowdown contact switches in order to limit the operating time at low speed optimization of the cycle time the slowdown time is constant regardless of the initial speed Stop distance No nO The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned Activation and adjustment of the Stop at distance calculated after the slowdown limit switch function L1 No nO Function inactive the next two parameters will therefore be inaccessible 0 01 yd to 10 94 yd Stop distance range in yards g Rated linear speed 0 20 to 5 00 m s 1 00 m s The parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned Rated linear speed in meters second Stop corrector 2
348. t RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A SELECTED LIST Ramp increment Acceleration Speed prop gain Delete Up Down Use the F2 and F3 keys to arrange the parameters in the list example below using F3 RDY Term 0 00 2 0A SELECTED LIST Acceleration Ramp increment Down Delete Up Selection of parameters included in the user menu Note The 15 line is PARAMETER SELECTION or RDY Term 0 00 Hz OA depending on the path ENT or List Parameter list making up the user menu AAV49426 04 2014 289 7 DISPLAY CONFIG RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 7 3 PARAMETER ACCESS PROTECTION VISIBILITY ENT Code lt lt gt gt Quick Term _ 0 0082 Tem 1000 oA Selection to display VISIBILITY PARAMETERS parameters or only the active parameters Press ESC to exit this screen ENT You remain exclusively in the 1 DRIVE MENU 1 DRIVE MENU menu All 1 1 SIMPLY START menus are selected by default 1 2 MONITORING Press ENT to deselect a menu 13 SETTINGS Press ENT to reselect a menu 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG RDY Term 0 00 2 RDY Tem 000 2 0 IMPORTANT The protected channel or channels must be PROTECTION PROTECTED CHANNELS selected as a protected parameter on a selected channel PROTECTED CHANNELS remains accessible on the channels that are not selected PROTECTED PARAMS In
349. t IntP and assigned to virtual input Network AI AIU1 New stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch function page 218 with the parameters Stop distance Std Rated linear speed nLS and Stop corrector SFd Positioning by sensors or limit switch POSITIONING BY SENSORS LPO page 219 can now be configured in positive logic or negative logic using Stop limit config SAL and Slowdown limit cfg dAL Parameter set switching PARAM SET SWITCHING MLP page 222 can now be assigned to the frequency thresholds attained Freq Th att and Freq Th 2 attain F2A New half floor HALF FLOOR HFF menu page 236 Menu 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Possibility of reinitializing the drive without turning it off via Product reset rP page 244 Possibility of reinitializing the drive via a logic input without turning it off using Product reset assig rPA page 244 The possibility of configuring the output phase loss fault Output Phase Loss OPL page 249 to Output cut OAC has been extended to all drive ratings previously limited 1045 kW 60 HP for ATV71eeeM3X and 75 kW 100HP for ATV71eeeN4 The external fault EXTERNAL FAULT EtF page 252 can now be configured in positive or negative logic via External fault config LEt New monitoring function based on speed measurement via Pulse input page 259 via the FREQUENCY METER FqF menu New function f
350. t for analog inputs and Pulse input only In the case of the PID regulator this is the PID output reference The limits are set by the Low speed LSP and High speed HSP parameters page 57 AAV49426 04 2014 111 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O Delinearization For analog inputs only The input can be delinearized by configuring an intermediate point on the input output curve of this input For range 0 100 Reference n 10096 See Interm point Y voltage 0 input Min value Interm point Max value 20 mA 096 X 100 or 10V Note For Interm point X 096 corresponds to Min value and 10096 to Max value For range 10096 gt 10096 Reference 4 100 1 1 1 x 1 1 1 Interm point Y 7 2 Min value Interm 0 0 100 point x voltage input T T 7 T T p 0 Interm point Max value 20 X 100 or 10 V Interm point Y Tee 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 100 112 AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting assignment Read only parameter cannot be configured
351. t range Factory setting Inspection The parameter can be accessed if brake logic control Brake assignment bLC page 181 and Out contactor ass OCC page 215 are assigned No nO Function not assigned L11 LI1 to LI6 LI7 LI7 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted Inspection mode is activated when the assigned input changes to state 1 0 to 25 Hz Inspection speed Value of the inspection mode frequency reference The parameter can be accessed if Inspection ISP is not No nO Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped 234 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Evacuation function The evacuation function is designed for elevator applications It is only accessible for ATV71eeeN4 380 480 V drives up to 75 kW 100 HP only When an elevator is stuck between 2 floors due to a power outage it must be possible to evacuate its occupants within a reasonable period of time This function requires an emergency power supply to be connected to the drive This power supply is at a reduced voltage and only allows a derated operating mode at reduced speed but with full torque The function requires One logic input to control evacuation operation Reduction of the voltage monitoring threshold An appropriate low speed refere
352. tarting of the ramp useful for lift application Frequency Reference Brake engage freq DEN Type of motor control Frequency Injection Parameter sets 2 Parameter sets 2 O L11 LI1 See the assignment conditions on page 145 Switching 2 parameter sets 3 parameter sets L1 No nO Function inactive Freq Th att FtA Switching via Freq threshold Ftd page 70 Freq Th 2 attain F2A Switching via Freq threshold 2 Ftd page 70 O Ramp Mode Switching during braking sequence This new assignment allows to put higher gain when the brake is open and before the starting of the ramp useful for lift application Frequency Reference Brake engage freq DEN Type of motor control Frequency Injection Parameter sets 2 Parameter sets 3 L4 See the assignment conditions on page 145 Switching 3 parameter sets Note In order to obtain 3 parameter sets 2 parameter sets must also be configured 222 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting PARAMETER SELECTION The parameter can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal if 2 parameter sets is not No Making an entry in this parameter opens a window containing all the adjustment parameters that can be accessed Select 1 t
353. ter as a of the maxiumum possible variation AO1 Filter 0 to 10 00 s Os Interference filtering This parameter is forced to 0 if AO1 asisgnment AO1 801 801 AAV49426 04 2014 133 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG I O AO2 assignment Same assignments as 1 without dO 1 901 No nO AO2 Type Voltage 10U Voltage output O Current Current output Voltage n10U Bipolar voltage output Current 0A AO2 min Output The parameter can be accessed if AO2 Type AO2t lt 0 to 20 0 mA urrent 0A AO2 max Output The parameter can be accessed if AO2 Type AO2t lt 0 to 20 0 mA urrent 0A AO2 min Output 0 to 10 0 V OV The parameter can be accessed if AO2 Type AO2t Voltage 10U or Voltage n10U AO2 max Output 0 to 10 0 V 10 0 V The parameter can be accessed if AO2 Type AO2t Voltage 100 or Voltage n10U Scaling AO2 min Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter as a 9 0 to 100 0 0 of the maxiumum possible variation Scaling AO2 max 0 to 100 0 100 0 90 Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter as a of the maxiumum possible variation AO Filter Interference filtering to 10 00 s 0s 134 AAV49426 04 2014 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS C
354. termined The drive can perform this measurement automatically Selecting a resolver type encoder The number of poles on motor must whole multiple of the number of poles resolver For example a 6 pole resolver will not operate with an 8 pole motor To obtain the best resolution we recommend selecting a resolver with the same number of poles as the motor Procedure for measuring the phase shift angle between the motor and the encoder Preliminary remarks Select the Angle setting type ASt measuring mode according to the type of machine being driven Angle setting type ASt lt W o load nLd Measurement with motion if the rotation of the motor is free no load brake released and safe During measurement current flows through the motor which may cause it to rotate one full revolution WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check that the rotation of the motor will not cause any dangerous movements Failure to follow this instruction can result in death or serious injury Angle setting type ASt With load brC Measurement without motion motor with or without load brake engaged or released This mode is recommended for a lift for example You must adhere to the following instructions The motor rotor must not move during measurement otherwise the result will be incorrect n some cases the measurement current can cause tripping on an Overcurrent OCF fault
355. that can be modified during operation or when stopped 206 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting 0 to 2 x Max Positive deadband frequency RU Positive deadband Value added algebraically to the speed reference Example for dbP lt 10 If reference 50 Hz 50 10 60 If reference 50 Hz 50 10 40 Negative deadband 0 to 2 x Max frequency tFr Negative deadband Value subtracted algebraically from the speed reference Example for dbn 10 If reference 50 Hz 50 10 40 If reference 50 Hz 50 10 60 to 999 9 s Torque ctrl time out Time following automatic exit of torque control mode in the event of a fault or alarm ctrl fault mgt Alarm ALrM Response of drive once time Torque ctrl time out rtO has elapsed Alarm ALrM Fault FLt Fault with freewheel stop Note If the motor is equipped with an encoder assigned to speed feedback the torque control function will trigger a Load slipping AnF fault One of the following solutions should be applied Set Load slip detection Sdd page 258 lt No nO Set Positive deadband dbP and Negative deadband dbn each to a value less than 1096 of the rated motor frequency Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped AAV4
356. the assigned parameter can be adapted in accordance with requirements by modifying the values of the lower and upper limits by means of two parameters for each analog output These parameters are given in 96 10096 corresponds to the total variation range of the configured parameter so 100 upper limit lower limit For example Sign torque Stq which varies between 3 and 3 times the rated torque 10096 corresponds to 6 times the rated torque The parameter Scaling AOx min ASLx modifies the lower limit new value lt lower limit range x ASLx The value 096 factory setting does not modify the lower limit The parameter Scaling AOx max ASHx modifies the upper limit new value lower limit range x ASLx The value 100 factory setting does not modify the upper limit Scaling AOx min ASLx must always be lower than Scaling AOx max ASHx Upper limit of the assigned parameter 100 96 New scale ASHx ASLx Lower limit of the assigned parameter Application example 1 The value of the signed motor torque at the AO2 output is to be transferred with 10 V with a range of 2 Tr to 2 Tr The parameter Sign torque Stq varies between 3 and 3 times the rated torque or a range of 6 times the rated torque Scaling AO2 min ASL2 must modify the lower limit by 1x the rated torque or 100 6 16 796 new value lower limit range x ASL2 Scaling AO2 max ASH2 must modify the upper
357. the motor Output Ph rotation ABC AbC ABC Forward L1 ACB ACb Reverse This parameter can be used to reverse the direction of rotation of the motor without reversing the wiring 44 AAV49426 04 2014 1 1 SIMPLY START SIM Parameters that can be changed during operation or when stopped Code Code Name Description Factory setting IEH LJ Mot therm current 0 2 to 1 5 In 1 According to drive rating Motor thermal protection current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate Acceleration 0 1 to 999 9 s 308 Time to accelerate from 0 to Rated motor freq FrS page 43 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven g Deceleration 0 1 to 999 9 s 3 0s Time to decelerate from the Rated motor freq FrS page 43 to 0 Make sure that this value is compatible with the inertia being driven Low speed Motor frequency at minimum reference can be set between 0 and High speed HSP High speed Motor frequency at maximum reference be set between Low speed LSP and Max frequency tFr The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if Standard mot freq bFr 60Hz NEMA 60 CAUTION For permanent magnet synchronous motors the maximum permissible speed must not be exceeded otherwise demagnetization may occur The maximum speed permitted by the motor drive chain or applicat
358. the reference channels Fr1 Fr1b and Fr2 FLUE nO 8 AI Al2 1 Cmd channel 1 Aa LCC4 RUN STOP FWD REV Graphic display terminal LI o Profile itchi F L 0 local Cmd switching COS FL 0 M SEP CMD Forward Vs Reverse STOP nO Graphic display STOP YES terminal PSE Stop Key priority Cmd channel 2 Key Parameter The black rectangle represents the factory setting assignment except for Profile Commands Cd1 Cd2 Terminals graphic display terminal integrated Modbus integrated CANopen communication card Controller Inside card 142 AAV49426 04 2014 1 6 COMMAND CtL Command channel for I O profile IO configuration Separate reference and command as in Separate SEP configuration The command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of the reference channels Fr1 Fr1b and Fr2 Cmd channel 1 Cdl Note Forced local is not active in I O profile LI o Profile Cmd switching ETS FL 0 Forced local L L bs nO CMD Forward __ Reverse STOP nO Graphic display STOP YES terminal PSE L d em Stop Key priority Cmd channel 2
359. the stopping of the moving part automatically once a preset distance has been traveled after the slowdown limit switch On the basis of the rated linear speed and the speed estimated by the drive when the slowdown limit switch is tripped the drive will induce the stop at the configured distance This function is useful in applications where one manual reset overtravel limit switch is common to both directions It will then only respond to ensure safety if the distance is exceeded The stop limit switch retains priority in respect of the function The Deceleration type dSF parameter can be configured to obtain either of the functions described below Frequency Deceleration type dSF Standard Std Slowdown frequency o Distance B A Slowdown limit switch reached B Automatic stop at distance Stop distance Std gt Frequency Deceleration type dSF Optimized OPt Slowdown frequency f Distance A B Note If deceleration ramp is modified while stopping at a distance is in progress this distance will not be observed If direction is modified while stopping at a distance is in progress this distance will not be observed the drive is shutdown while stopping at distance is in progress this distance will not be observed on the next power up A DANGER UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Check th
360. these screens all parameters in the 1 1 DRIVE MENU 1 3 SETTINGS DRIVE MENU menu can be protected 1 1 SIMPLY START ENT and are displayed for selection except gt Ramp increment for the Expert parameters 1 2 MONITORING Acceleration buius pecejeration puton adaini 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL Acceleration 2 deselect all the parameters 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Deceleration 2 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT No selections can be made in this screen if there are no parameters PROTECTED PARAMS 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT REF OPERATIONS RAMP STOP CONFIGURATION AUTO DC INJECTION PROTECTED PARAMS JOG Note The protected parameters are no longer accessible and are not therefore displayed for the selected channels 290 AAV49426 04 2014 7 DISPLAY CONFIG RDY Term 0 00Hz 0A 7 4 KEYPAD PARAMETERS Contrast Keypad stand by Power up menu Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Keypad contrast 0 to 100 Adjustment of contrast on graphic display unit Keypad stand by Configures and adjusts the stand by mode of the graphic display unit L1 No No stand by mode L1 1 to 10 Adjusts the time during which the terminal is to remain idle before stand by mode is triggered in minutes After this idle time the display backlight turns off and the contrast is reduced The screen returns to normal operation when a key or th
361. tic measurements using Angle setting activ AtA If Angle setting type ASt W o load nLd ensure that the safety conditions outlined earlier are met at all times If using a relative encoder incremental or SinCos it is recommended that you set Angle setting activ AtA Power On POn or Run order AUtO 6 If an Angle error ASF fault occurs Angle auto test ASA returns to No nO Check that the parameters and instructions relating to this procedure have been carried out correctly and perform the measurement again Comments The phase shift angle must be re measured each time The motor is changed The encoder is changed The coupling between the motor and encoder is removed The Output Ph rotation PHr parameter is modified The Coder rotation inv EnRI parameter is modified If a relative encoder incremental or SinCos is used measurement must be repeated each time the motor is turned off on It is therefore recommended that you set Angle setting activ Power On POn or Run order AUtO 88 AAV49426 04 2014 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Angle setting type one Mode for measuring the phase shift angle between the motor and the encoder With load brC Measurement without motion possible with or without load brake engaged or released L1 W o load nLd Measurement with motion only for free motors brake released without l
362. tically The cause of the fault must be removed before resetting by turning off and then back on AnF ASF brF EnF SOF SPF and tnF faults can also be reset remotely by means of a logic input or control bit Fault reset rSF parameter page 244 AnF EnF InFA InFb SOF SPF and tnF faults can be inhibited and cleared remotely by means of a logic input or control bit Fault inhibit assign InH parameter page 256 AI2 input Probable cause Non conforming signal on analog input AI2 Check the wiring of analog input AI2 and the value of the signal Load slipping The encoder speed feedback does not match the reference Check the motor gain and stability parameters Add a braking resistor Check the size of the motor drive load Check the encoder s mechanical coupling and its wiring If the torque control function is used see Note on page 207 Angle Error A modification has changed the phase shift angle between the motor and the encoder or resolver The Procedure for measuring the phase shift angle between the motor and the encoder page 88 has failed or has not been performed for the law Sync mot SYn bad setting of the speed loop when the reference goes through 0 See comments on page 88 Repeat the Procedure for measuring the phase shift angle between the motor and the encoder page 88 DBR overload The braking resistor is under excessive stress Ch
363. tion window if using the graphic display terminal Press the ENT key for 2 s if using the integrated display terminal HMI format Read only parameter cannot be modified Modbus Address OFF to 247 Modbus add Prg C Modbus address of the Controller Inside card OFF at 247 The parameter can be accessed if the Controller Inside card has been inserted and depending on its configuration please consult the specific documentation Modbus add Com C OFF Modbus address of the communication card OFF to 247 The parameter can be accessed if a communication card has been inserted and depending on its configuration please consult the specific documentation Modbus baud rate 19 2 kbps 4 8 9 6 19 2 38 4 kbps on the integrated display terminal 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bauds on the graphic display terminal Modbus format 801 8E1 8n1 8n2 Modbus time out 0 1 to 30s CANopen address OFF to 127 CANopen bit rate 125 kbps 50 125 250 500 kbps 1 Mbps Error code Read only parameter cannot be modified CANopen store func No nO Fault ignored O YES YES Freewheel stop This parameter allows to deactivate the restore parameters CanOpen request function in the drive 1010 and 1011 CanOpen objects 268 AAV49426 04 2014 1 9 COMMUNICATION COM Name Description Adj
364. to avoid speed surges for example If Profile CHCF page 146 Not separ SIM or Separate SEP copying will only be possible from channel 1 to channel 2 If Profile CHCF I O profile IO copying will be possible in both directions No nO No copy Reference SP Copy reference Command Cd Copy command Cmd ref ALL Copy command and reference A reference or a command cannot be copied to a channel on the terminals The reference copied is FrH before ramp unless the destination channel reference is set via speed In this case the reference copied is rFr after ramp WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION Copying the command and or reference can change the direction of rotation Check that this is safe Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury 148 AAV49426 04 2014 1 6 COMMAND CtL As the graphic display terminal may be selected as the command and or reference channel its action modes can be configured The parameters on this page can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal and not on the integrated display terminal Comments The display terminal command reference is only active if the command and or reference channels from the terminal are active with the exception of T K command via the display terminal which takes priority over these channels Press T K command via the display terminal again to revert
365. to be added to Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Fr1b No nO No source assigned 11 Analog input 12 12 Analog input 13 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCC Graphic display terminal Modbus Mdb Integrated Modbus CANopen CAn Integrated CANopen Com card nEt Communication card if inserted C Insid card APP Controller Inside card if inserted RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted Network AI AIU1 Virtual input via communication bus can be configured using Al net channel AIC1 page 117 lod 807 A WARNING UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION If the equipment switches to forced local mode see page 269 the virtual input remains fixed at the last value transmitted Do not use the virtual input and forced local mode in the same configuration Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or serious injury Summing ref 3 No nO Selection of a reference to be added to Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Ref 1B channel Fr1b Possible assignments are identical to Summing ref 2 SA2 above Subtract ref 2 No nO Selection of a reference to be subtracted from Ref 1 channel Fr1 or Re
366. tor N 3 Thread guide 1 I 1 1 Thread 1 I 1 1 I Gearbox Traverse control motor Cam The speed of rotation of the cam must follow a precise profile to ensure that the reel is steady compact and linear A Run command 4 LI or traverse control bit t Motor speed Base reference AGC ramp dEC ramp gt t start of function end of function Bit 15 of word LRS1 traverse control active The function starts when the drive has reached its base reference and the traverse control command has been enabled When the traverse control command is disabled the drive returns to its base reference following the ramp determined by the traverse control function The function then stops as soon as it has returned to this reference Bit 15 of word LRS1 is at 1 while the function is active AAV49426 04 2014 227 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Function parameters These define the cycle of frequency variations around the base reference as shown in the diagram below Motor speed tdn tUP Frequency jump 4 trH Base reference trL Frequency jump 0 t e trC Yarn control Assignment of the traverse control command to a logic input or to a communication bus control word bit tdn Traverse ctrl decel time in seconds tUP Traverse ctrl accel time in seconds
367. ts the EbO alarm and the EbOt operating time to zero and reinitializes the reference to the base reference As long as rtr remains at 1 the traverse control function is disabled and the speed remains the same as the base reference This command is used primarily when changing reels Motor speed Base reference dtF AAV49426 04 2014 229 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Counter wobble Master drive Slave drive Reel of yarn Synchronization Gearbox 7 Main shaft Winding motor Thread guide 1 1 Thread 1 1 Gearbox Thread guide motor Cam The Counter wobble function is used in certain applications to obtain a constant yarn tension when the Traverse control function is producing considerable variations in speed on the yarn guide motor trH and trL see page 232 Two motors must be used one master and one slave The master controls the speed of the yarn guide the slave controls the winding speed The function assigns the slave a speed profile which is in antiphase to that of the master This means that synchronization is required using one of the master s logic outputs and one of the slave s logic inputs Run command on master and slave Traverse control command on master and slave gt t Yarn guid
368. type of encoder used L1 AABB AAbb For signals A A B B or A A B B Z Z AB Ab For signals A L1 A A For signal A Value cannot be accessed if Encoder usage EnU page 120 lt Spd fdk reg rEG Encoder check Not done nO Check encoder feedback See procedure page 76 This parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted and if Encoder usage EnU page 120 is not Speed ref PGr L1 Not done nO Check not performed Yes YES Activates monitoring of the encoder L1 Done dOnE Check performed successfully The check procedure checks The direction of rotation of the encoder motor The presence of signals wiring continuity The number of pulses revolution If a fault is detected the drive locks in Encoder fault EnF fault mode Encoder usage The parameter can be accessed if an encoder card has been inserted No nO Function inactive In this case the other parameters cannot be accessed Fdbk monit SEC The encoder provides speed feedback for monitoring only Spd fdk reg The encoder provides speed feedback for regulation and monitoring This configuration is automatic if the drive is configured for closed loop operation Motor control type Ctt FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY If Motor control type Ctt lt SVC V UUC the encoder operates in speed feedback mode and enables static correction of the speed t
369. ult Name Probable cause Remedy Incorrect config Option card changed or removed Check that there are no card errors In the event of the option card being changed removed deliberately see the remarks below Control card replaced by a control Check that there are no card errors card configured on a drive with a In the event of the control card being changed deliberately different rating see the remarks below The current configuration is Return to factory settings or retrieve the backup inconsistent configuration if it is valid see page 276 Invalid config Invalid configuration Check the configuration loaded previously The configuration loaded in the drive Load a compatible configuration via the bus or communication network is inconsistent Max frequency tFr has been setata Set Max frequency at a value lower or equal to 599 value higher than 599Hz Abnormal load variation Check that the load is not blocked by an obstacle Removal of a run command causes a reset Dynamic load fault Cards pairing The CARDS PAIRING PPI In the event of a card error reinsert the original card function page 264 has been Confirm the configuration by entering the Pairing password configured and a drive card has been PPI if the card was changed deliberately changed Input phase loss suis incorrectly supplied or a fuse Check the power connection and the fuses own Failure of one phase 3 phase ATV71 used on a
370. um speed 0 00 to 300 kHz 300 kHz Freq max value The parameter can be accessed if Encoder usage Speed ref PGr and if Reference type PGA Freq gen PtG Frequency corresponding to the maximum speed 0 to 1000 ms Freq signal filter The parameter can be accessed if Encoder usage Speed ref PGr Interference filtering Resolver Exct Freq B Resolver excitation frequency The parameter can be accessed if a VW3 A3 408 encoder for resolver has been inserted O 4 kHz 4 4 kHz O 8 kHz 8 8 kHz 12 kHz 12 12 kHz Resolver poles nbr Number of resolver poles The parameter be accessed if a VW3 A3 408 encoder card for resolver has been inserted 2 poles 2P 2 poles max speed 7500 rpm 4 poles 4P 4 poles max speed 3750 rpm 6 poles 6P 6 poles max speed 2500 rpm 8 poles 8P 8 poles max speed 1875 rpm Ilf the number of poles of the motor is not an integer multiple of the number of poles of the resolver it is necessary to configure the parameter Angle setting activ Power On POn Run order AUtO AAV49426 04 2014 121 1 5 INPUTS OUTPUTS CFG Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Encoder protocol Undefined Und Type of encoder used L1 Undefined Und Not defined L1 EnDat 2 1
371. um value is limited by the following conditions t must not exceed 10 times the value of Rated motor freq FrS page 78 for an asynchronous motor or Nominal freq sync FrSS page 87 for a synchronous motor It must not exceed 500 Hz if Motor control type Ctt page 72 is not V F or if the drive rating is higher than ATV71HD37 Values between 500 Hz and 599 Hz are only possible in V F control and for powers limited to 37 kW 50 HP In this case configure Motor control type Ctt before Max frequency tFr Output Ph rotation ABC AbC O ABC AbC Forward O ACB ACb Reverse This parameter can be used to reverse the direction of rotation of the motor without reversing the wiring Do not modify the Output Ph rotation PHr parameter when Motor control type Ctt page 72 z FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY The direction of rotation must be modified if required before or during the encoder check procedure detailed on page 76 when Motor control type Ctt is not FVC FUC or Sync CL FSY Otherwise checking and measuring procedures must be performed again Angle auto test ASA and Angle offset value ASU return to No nO AAV49426 04 2014 73 1 4 MOTOR CONTROL drC Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Sinus filter L1 No nO No sinus filter Yes YES Use of a sinus filter to limit overvoltages on the motor and reduce the ground fault leakage
372. un command may be requested during the brake engagement phase Whether or not the brake release sequence is executed depends on the value selected for 60 brHO A Run command Frequency b0 0 Relay or logic output a Injection Frequency bEn 4 BRH brHO 1 Relay or logic output Note If a run command is requested during the ttr phase the complete brake control sequence is initialized b1 Deactivation of the brake contact in steady state fault 0 O 0 0 The brake contact in steady state fault is active fault if the contact is open during operation The brF brake contact fault is monitored in all operating phases l 1 1 The brake contact in steady state fault is inactive The brF brake contact fault is only monitored during the brake release and engage phases 184 AAV49426 04 2014 1 7 APPLICATION FUNCT FUn Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting b2 0 Taking the brake contact into account for the brake control sequence 0 0 The brake contact is not taken into account 1 1 The brake contact is taken into account Use in open loop and closed loop mode logic input is assigned to the brake contact BRH b2 brH2 lt 0 During the brake release sequence the reference is enabled at the end of the time Brake Release time brt
373. uration 1 active Cnfg 2 act CnF2 Configuration 2 active Set 1 active CFP1 Parameter set 1 active Set 2 active CFP2 Parameter set 2 active Set 3 active CFP3 Parameter set 3 active DC charged dbL DC bus charging In braking brS Drive braking P removed PRM Drive locked by Power removal input Fr met alar FqLA Measured speed threshold attained Pulse warning thd FqL page 70 I present MCP Motor current present Limit sw att LSA Limit switch attained Load alarm dLdA Load variation detection see page 262 Alarm Grp 1 AGI Alarm group 1 Alarm Grp 2 2 Alarm group 2 Alarm Grp 3 Alarm group 3 PTC1 alarm P1A Probe alarm 1 PTC2 alarm P2A Probe alarm 2 LIG PTC al PLA LI6 PTC probe alarm Ext fault al EFA External fault alarm Under V al USA Undervoltage alarm Uvolt warn UPA Undervoltage warning slipping al AnA Slipping alarm Al Drive overheating Load mvt al 65 Braking speed alarm Brk cont al Brake contact alarm Lim att SSA Torque limit alarm Trq ctrl al Torque control alarm IGBT al tJA IGBT alarm Brake al Braking resistor temperature alarm Option al APA Alarm generated by the Controller Inside card Al 4 20 Alarm indicating absence of 4 20 mA signal on input 14 Al 4 20
374. uration of Type of stop Stt page 162 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 108 if control is via the terminals Configuring an alarm for this fault is recommended assigned to a logic output for example in order to indicate the cause of the stop fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as long as the fault persists and the run command has not been removed 1 Spd maint rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the fault occurred as long as the fault is present and the run command has not been removed 1 Ramp stop rMP Stop on ramp Fast stop FSt Fast stop DC injection dCI DC injection stop This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions See table on page 151 1 Because in this case the fault does not trigger a stop it is essential to assign a relay or logic output to its indication AAV49426 04 2014 255 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Parameter can be accessed in Expert mode Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting Fault inhibit assign To assign fault inhibit press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s CAUTION Inhibiting faults results in the drive not being protected This in
375. ustment range Factory setting mE See the specific documentation for the card used Forced local assign No nO Function inactive L11 L11 to L16 LI6 LI7 LI7 to L110 L110 If VW3A3201 logic I O card has been inserted L111 L111 to L114 L114 If VW3A3202 extended I O card has been inserted Forced local mode is active when the input is at state 1 Forced local assign FLO is forced to No nO if Profile CHCF page 146 I O profile Forced local Ref No nO e No nO Not assigned control via the terminals with zero reference 11 Analog input 12 AI2 Analog input 13 AI3 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted 14 Analog input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted HMI LCC Assignment of the reference and command to the graphic display terminal Reference Frequency ref LFr page 52 command RUN STOP FWD REV buttons RP PI Frequency input if VW3A3202 extension card has been inserted Encoder PG Encoder input if encoder card has been inserted If the reference is assigned to an analog input RP PI or Encoder PG the command is automatically assigned to the terminals as well logic inputs Time out forc local 0 1 to 30s The parameter can be accessed if Forced local assign FLO is not No nO Time delay before communication
376. ut Phase Loss OPL lt Output cut OAC page 249 Test on a low power motor or without a motor In factory settings mode motor phase loss detection is active Output Phase Loss OPL Yes YES To check the drive in a test or maintenance environment without having to use a motor with the same rating as the drive in particular for high power drives deactivate motor phase loss detection Output Phase Loss OPL lt No nO Check and optimize the following parameters IR compensation UFr page 101 Rated motor volt UnS and Rated mot current nCr page 78 and perform Auto tuning tUn page 93 Mains overvoltage Line voltage too high Disturbed mains supply Check the line voltage PTC1 overheat Overheating of the PTC1 probes detected PTC2 overheat Overheating of the PTC2 probes detected LI6 PTC overheat Overheating of PTC probes detected on input LI6 Check the motor load and motor size Check the motor ventilation Wait for the motor to cool before restarting Check the type and state of the PTC probes PTC1 probe PTC1 probes open or short circuited PTC2 probe PTC2 probes open or short circuited LI6 PTC probe PTC probes on input LI6 open or short circuited Check the PTC probes and the wiring between them and the motor drive IGBT short circuit Power component fault Perform a test via the 1 10 DIAGNOSTICS menu Inspect repai
377. validates the warranty Check that the possible consequences do not present any risk Failure to follow this instruction can result in equipment damage L1 No nO Function inactive O L11 See the assignment conditions on page 145 If the assigned input or bit is at 0 fault monitoring is active If the assigned input or bit is at 1 fault monitoring is inactive Active faults are reset on a rising edge change from 0 to 1 of the assigned input or bit Note The Power Removal function and any faults that prevent any form of operation are not affected by this function A list of faults affected by this function appears on pages 294 to 299 256 AAV49426 04 2014 1 8 FAULT MANAGEMENT FLt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting C ANAC Network fault mgt Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication fault with a communication card Ignore nO Fault ignored Freewheel YES Freewheel stop O Per STT Stt Stop according to configuration of Type of stop Stt page 162 without fault tripping In this case the fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the fault disappears according to the restart conditions of the active command channel e g according to 2 3 wire control tCC and 2 wire type tCt page 108 if control is via the terminals fallback spd LFF Change to fallback speed maintained as
378. value ASU is set to No nO This option is recommended for use with a VW3 A3 401 to 407 card or with VW3 A3 411 card when the line contactor function has been configured loss of angle on each stop 1 If Angle setting activ Power On POn or Run order AUtO it is advisable to set Angle setting type ASt lt With load brC 1 If a line contactor or output contactor function has been configured the contactor closes during measurement Note2 At each multi motor configuration switching the drive performs an automatic measurement of the phase shift angle at next run order Angle offset value Phase shift angle between the motor and the encoder L1 No nO Measurement has not been performed or has failed or Output Ph rotation PHr has been modified or measurement has been lost due to powering down 1 0 to 8191 Phase shift angle 8191 corresponds to 360 Not done tAb Angle setting status Information on the phase shift angle measurement between the motor and the encoder cannot be modified Not done tAb Phase shift angle not defined Pending PEnd Measurement requested but not yet performed In Progress PrOG Measurement in progress Failed FAIL Measurement failed Done dOnE Measurement performed successfully Customized CUS The phase shift angle value has been entered by the user via the display terminal or serial li
379. values greater than 9999 will be displayed on the 4 digit display with a period mark after the thousand digit e g 15 65 for 15650 in these menus on the pages indicated to aid programming These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function their description is detailed AAV49426 04 2014 1 3 SETTINGS SEt Name Description Adjustment range Factory setting PID error Alarm 0 to 65535 1 100 See page 201 Regulator error monitoring threshold 1 to 100 Speed input 95 See page 202 Multiplying coefficient for predictive speed input Preset ref PID 2 See page 204 1 See page 204 Preset PID reference Preset ref PID 3 See page 204 1 See page 204 Preset PID reference Preset ref PID 4 See page 204 1 See page 204 Preset PID reference Brake release FW 0 to 1 32 In 2 See page 182 Brake release current threshold for lifting or forward movement 0 to 1 32 In 2 Brake release Rev See page 182 Brake release current threshold for lowering or reverse movement Brake Release time 0 to 5 00 s See page 182 Brake release time delay Auto AUtO Auto AUtO Brake release freq 0 to 10 Hz See page 182 Brake release frequency threshold Auto AUtO Auto
380. ve flt FLt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments LO1 holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false LO2 assignment Identical to LO1 LO2 delay time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The delay cannot be set for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC Output cont OCC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at O The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes true LO2 active at 1 POS Configuration of the operating logic 1 POS State 1 when the information is true 0 nEG State 0 when the information is true The configuration 1 POS cannot be modified for the No drive flt FLt Brk control DLC DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments LO2 holding time 0 to 9999 ms 0 The holding time cannot be set for the No drive flt Brk control DC charging dCO and Input cont LLC assignments and remains at 0 The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed when the information becomes false

[1.7 APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents